(12) INTERNATIONAL APPLICATION PUBLISHED UNDER THE PATENT COOPERATION TREATY (PCT) (19) World Intellectual Property Organization International Bureau (10) International Publication Number (43) International Publication Date WO 2014/140862 A2 18 September 2014 (18.09.2014) P O P C T

(51) International Patent Classification: Not classified (74) Agent: WATSON, Robert; Mewburn Ellis LLP, 33 Gutter Lane, London EC2V 8AS (GB). (21) International Application Number: PCT/IB20 14/00 1029 (81) Designated States (unless otherwise indicated, for every kind of national protection available): AE, AG, AL, AM, (22) International Filing Date: AO, AT, AU, AZ, BA, BB, BG, BH, BN, BR, BW, BY, 13 March 2014 (13.03.2014) BZ, CA, CH, CL, CN, CO, CR, CU, CZ, DE, DK, DM, (25) Filing Language: English DO, DZ, EC, EE, EG, ES, FI, GB, GD, GE, GH, GM, GT, HN, HR, HU, ID, IL, IN, IR, IS, JP, KE, KG, KN, KP, KR, (26) Publication Language: English KZ, LA, LC, LK, LR, LS, LT, LU, LY, MA, MD, ME, (30) Priority Data: MG, MK, MN, MW, MX, MY, MZ, NA, NG, NI, NO, NZ, 61/778,777 13 March 2013 (13.03.2013) US OM, PA, PE, PG, PH, PL, PT, QA, RO, RS, RU, RW, SA, 61/856,35 1 19 July 2013 (19.07.2013) US SC, SD, SE, SG, SK, SL, SM, ST, SV, SY, TH, TJ, TM, TN, TR, TT, TZ, UA, UG, US, UZ, VC, VN, ZA, ZM, (71) Applicant: SPIROGEN SARL [CH/CH]; Chemin de la ZW. Pacottaz 1, CH-1806 St-Legier-Chiesaz (CH). (84) Designated States (unless otherwise indicated, for every (72) Inventors: HOWARD, Philip, Wilson; Medimmune kind of regional protection available): ARIPO (BW, GH, Spirogen Business Unit, The QMB Innovation Centre, 42 GM, KE, LR, LS, MW, MZ, NA, RW, SD, SL, SZ, TZ, New Road, London E l 2AX (GB). FLYGARE, John, A.; UG, ZM, ZW), Eurasian (AM, AZ, BY, KG, KZ, RU, TJ, Genentech, Inc., 1 DNA Way, South San Francisco, CA TM), European (AL, AT, BE, BG, CH, CY, CZ, DE, DK, 94080 (US). PILLOW, Thomas; Genentech, Inc., 1 DNA EE, ES, FI, FR, GB, GR, HR, HU, IE, IS, IT, LT, LU, LV, Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080 (US). WEI, Bin- MC, MK, MT, NL, NO, PL, PT, RO, RS, SE, SI, SK, SM, qing; Genentech, Inc., 1 DNA Way, South San Francisco, TR), OAPI (BF, BJ, CF, CG, CI, CM, GA, GN, GQ, GW, CA 94080 (US). KM, ML, MR, NE, SN, TD, TG).

[Continued on nextpage]

(54) Title: PYRROLOBENZODIAZEPINES AND CONJUGATES THEREOF (57) Abstract: A conjugate of formula A wherein: D represents either group ¾_ , - „ D l or D2 the dotted line indicates the optional presence of a double bond A .A A A A between C2 and C3; when there is a double bond present between C2 and 2 C3, R is selected from the group consisting of: (ia) -10 aryl group, option ally substituted by one or more substituents selected from the group compris-

, A ing: halo, nitro, cyano, ether, carboxy, ester, C 1.7 alkyl, .7 heterocyclyl and „ bis-oxy-Ci-3 alkylene; (ib) C1-5 saturated aliphatic alkyl; (ic) -6 saturated _ cycloalkyl; (id) wherein each of R 3 1, R32 and R33 a, re independently selected

A " „,, from H, C 1-3 saturated alkyl, C2-3 alkenyl, C2-3 alkynyl and eyelopropyl, where the total number of carbon atoms in the R 2 group is no more than 5 ; (ie) A ¾ wherein one of R 5 and R 5 is H and the other is selected from: phenyl, which phenyl is optionally substituted by a group selected from halo, methyl, methoxy; pyridyl; and thiophenyl; and (if) where R34 is selected from: H; C1-3

™ saturated alkyl; C 2-3 alkenyl; C 2-3 alkynyl; cyclopropyl; phenyl, which phenyl is optionally substituted by a group selected from halo, methyl, methoxy; pyridyl; and thiophenyl; (ig) halo; when there is a single bond present between C2 and C3, where R and R are independently selected from H,

F, Ci- saturated alkyl, C 2-3 alkenyl, which alkyl and alkenyl groups are op tionally substituted by a group selected from C1-4 alkyl amido and C alkyl ester; or, when one of R 1 and R 1 is H, the other is selected from nitrile and A; a C i- alkyl ester; D' represents either group D'l or D2: wherein the dotted y < A line indicates the optional presence of a double bond between C2' and C3'; 6 9 R and R are independently selected from H, R, OH, OR, SH, SR, NH 2, NHR, NRR', N0 2, Me3Sn and halo; R7 is independently selected from H, R, 00 OH, OR, SH, SR, NH , NHR, NRR', Me Sn and halo; Y is selected o 2 NO2, from formulae Al, A2, A3, A4, A 5 and A6. L is a linker connected to a cell binding agent; CBA is the cell binding agent; n is an integer selected in the range of 0 to 48; RA4 is a Ci. alkylene group; either (a) R 10 is H, and R 11 is OH, ORA, where RA is C alkyl; or (b) R 10 and R 11 form a nitrogen-carbon double bond between the nitrogen and carbon atoms to o which they are bound; or (c) R 10 is H and R 11 is OSO M, where z is 2 or 3 and M is a monovalent pharmaceutically acceptable cation; R and R' are each independently selected from optionally substituted Ci-12 alkyl, -20 heterocyclyl and -20 o [Continued on nextpage] w o 2014/140862 A2 llll II II 11III I II 11II III I II 11III II I II

Published: — without international search report and to be republished upon receipt of that report (Rule 48.2(g))

aryl groups, and optionally in relation to the group NRR', R and R' together with the nitrogen atom to which they are attached form an optionally substituted 4-, 5-, 6- or 7-membered heterocyclic ring; wherein R 16 , R17 , R19 , R20, R2 1 and R22 are as defined for R R7, R9, R10, R 11 and R2 respectively; wherein Z is CH or N; wherein T and T are independently selected from a single bond or a Ci alkylene, which chain may be interrupted by one or more heteroatoms e.g. O, S, N(H), NMe, provided that the number of atoms in the shortest chain of atoms between X and X' is 3 to 12 atoms; and X and X' are independently selected from O, S and N(H); except that there cannot be double bonds between both C2 and C3 and C2' and C3'. The present invention relates to pyrro!obenzodiazepines (PBDs), in particular pyrrolobenzodiazepines having a linker group connected to a cell binding agent.

Background to the invention Pyrrolobenzodiazepines Some pyrrolobenzodiazepines (PBDs) have the ability to recognise and bond to specific sequences of DNA; the preferred sequence is PuGPu. The first PBD antitumour antibiotic, anthramycin, was discovered in 1965 (Leimgruber, et a!., J. Am. Chem. Soc, 87, 5793-5795 (1965); Leimgruber, et aL, J. Am. Chem. Soc, 87, 5791-5793 (1965)). Since then, a number of naturally occurring PBDs have been reported, and over 10 synthetic routes have been developed to a variety of analogues (Thurston, et ai., Chem. Rev. 1994, 433-465 (1994); AntoROW, D. and Thurston, D.E., Chem. Rev. 2011 11 (4), 2815-2864). Family members include abbeymycin (Hochlowski, e ai, J. Antibiotics, 40, 145-148 (1987)), chicamycin

(Konishi, et ai, J. Antibiotics, 37, 200-206 (1984)), DC-81 (Japanese Patent 58-180 487; Thurston, et ai., Chem. Brit, 26, 767-772 (1990); Bose, e ai., Tetrahedron, 48, 751-758

(1992)), mazethrarnycin (Kuminoto, et ai., J. Antibiotics, 33, 665-667 (1980)), neothramycins A and B (Takeuchi, et ai., J. Antibiotics, 29, 93-96 (1976)), porothramycin (Tsunakawa, eia/., J. Antibiotics, 41, 1366-1373 (1988)), prothracarcin (Shimizu, etai, J. Antibiotics, 29, 2492- 2503 (1982); Langley and Thurston, J. Org. Chem., 52, 91-97 (1987)), sibanomicin (DC- 102)(Hara, etai., J. Antibiotics, 41, 702-704 (1988); Itoh, etai., J. Antibiotics, 4 1, 1281-1284 (1988)), sibiromycin (Leber, et ai., J. A . Chem. Soc, 10, 2992-2993 (1988)) and tomamycin (Arima, et ai., J. Antibiotics, 25, 437-444 (1972)). PBDs are of the general structure:

They differ in the number, type and position of substituents, in both their aromatic A rings and pyrroio C rings, and in the degree of saturation of the C ring. the B-ring there is either an imine (N=C), a carbino!amine(NH-CH(OH)), or a carbinolamine methyl ether (NH- CH(OMe)) at the -C 1 position which is the electrophilic centre responsible for alkylating DNA. Ail of the known natural products have an (S)-configuration at the chirai C 11a position which provides them with a right-handed twist when viewed from the C ring towards the A ring. This gives them the appropriate three-dimensional shape for isoheliciiy with the minor groove of B-form DNA, leading to a snug fit at the binding site (Kohn, In Antibiotics III. Springer-Verlag, New York, pp. 3-1 1 (1975); Hurley and Needham-VanDevanter, Acc. Chem. Res., 1 , 230-237 (1986)). Their ability to form an adduct in the minor groove, enables them to interfere with DNA processing, hence their use as antitumour agents.

A particularly advantageous pyrrolobenzodiazepine compound is described by Gregson et ai. [Chem. Commun. 1999, 797-798) as compound 1, and by Gregson etal. {J. Med. Chem. 2001, 44, 1 61-1174) as compound 4a. This compound, also known as SJG-136, is shown below:

SJG-1 6

Other dimeric PBD compounds, such as those bearing C2 aryi substituents in WO 2005/

These compounds have been shown to be highly useful cytotoxic agents.

Antibody-drug conjugates Antibody therapy has been established for the targeted treatment of patients with cancer, immunological and angiogenic disorders (Carter, P. (2006) Nature Reviews Immunology 6:343-357). The use of antibody-drug conjugates (ADC), i.e. immunoconjugates, for the local delivery of cytotoxic or cytostatic agents, i.e. drugs to kill or inhibit tumor ceils in the treatment of cancer, targets delivery of the drug moiety to tumors, and intracellular accumulation therein, whereas systemic administration of these unconjugated drug agents may result in unacceptable levels of toxicity to normal cells as well as the tumor cells sought to be eliminated (Xie et a (2006) Expert. Opin. Bioi. Ther. 6(3):281-291; Kovtun e a/ (2006) Cancer Res. 66(6):3214-3121; Law el a (2006) Cancer Res 68(4):2328-2337; W u e a! (2005) Nature Biotech. 23(9):1 137-1 145; Lambert J. (2005) Current Opin. in Pharmacol. 5:543-549; Hamann P. (2005) Expert Opin. Ther. Patents 15(9): 1087-1 103; Payne, G. (2003) Cancer Cei! 3:207-212; Trail et al (2003) Cancer Immunol. Immunother. 52:328-337; Syrigos and Epenetos (1999) Anticancer Research 19:605 614)

Maximal efficacy with minimal toxicity is sought thereby. Efforts to design and refine ADC have focused on the selectivity of monoclonal antibodies (mAbs) as well as drug mechanism of action, drug-linking, drug/antibody ratio (loading), and drug-releasing properties (Junutula. et al., 2008b Nature Biotech., 26(8):925-932; Dornan et a/ (2009) Blood 114(1 3):272 1-2729; US 7521541; US 7723485; WO2009/052249; McDonagh (2006) Protein Eng. Design Se . 19(7): 2S9-307; Doronina et a/ (2006) Bioconj. Chem. 17:1 14-124; Erickson et a/ (2006)

Cancer Res. 66(8): 1-8; Sanderson e / (2QQ5) C!in. Cancer Res. 1:843-852; Jeffrey et al (2005) J. Med. Chem. 48:1344-1358; Hamb!ett et a (2004) Clin. Cancer Res. 10:7063- 7070). Drug moieties may impart their cytotoxic and cytostatic effects by mechanisms including tubulin binding, DNA binding, or topoisomerase inhibition. Some cytotoxic drugs tend to be inactive or less active when conjugated to large antibodies or protein receptor ligands.

PBDs in ADCs

Dimeric PBDs have been disclosed as the drugs in drug conjugates. For example, in WO 201 1/130598, dimer PBD compounds having linker groups for connection to a cell binding agent, such as an antibody, are disclosed where the linker group is attached to one of the available N10 positions, a d are generally cleaved by action of a enzyme on the linker group.

By contrast, in WO 201 1/130613 and WO 201 1/130616, dimer PBD compounds having linker groups for connection to a cell binding agent, such as an antibody, are disclosed where the linker group is attached via an aromatic group at one of the C2 posticus, and are generally cleaved by action of an enzyme on the linker group. Such antibody drug conjugates are also described in Fiygare, J., etal, Chem. Biol. Drug Des. 8 1: 3-12 1 (2013), which also describes other types of antibody drug conjugates.

A further approach is described in WO 2007/085930, wherein tomamycin-like dirners have a linker group for connection to a ceil binding agent, such as an antibody, where the linker group is attached to the tether between the tomamycin units, and are generally cleaved by action of an enzyme on the linker group.

The present inventors have developed a novel approach to forming PBD conjugates with eel binding agents, and in particular PBD antibody conjugates.

Summary of the invention in a general aspect the present invention provides a conjugate comprising a PBD dimer compound with a linker for connecting to a cell binding agent, wherein the linker has a triazoie, piperazine, propargylene or oxime group attached to a phenyiene or pyriydylene in the bridge linking the two PBD monomers. The cell binding agent is preferably an antibody. in a first aspect, the present invention provides novel conjugate compounds of formula (A):

D 1 the dotted line indicates the optional presence of a double bond between C2 and C3; when there is a double bond present between C2 and C3, is selected from the group consisting of:

(ia) C - 0 ary! group, optionally substituted by one or more substituents selected from the group comprising: halo, nitro, cyano, ether, carboxy, ester, C - alky!, C3-7 heterocye!yl and bis-oxy-C-!-3 aikyiene;

(ib) Ci_5 saturated aliphatic aikyi;

(ic) C3-6 saturated cycloaikyi; (id) , wherein each of R , and are independently selected from H,

C 3 saturated aikyi, C .3 alkenyi, C 3 alkynyl and cyclopropyi, where the total number of carbon atoms in the R2 group is no more than 5;

R3 b

(ie) , wherein one of R and R3 is H and the other is selected from: phenyl, which phenyl is optionally substituted by a group selected from halo, methyl, rnet and thiophenyl; and

(if) , where R is selected from: H; C _3 saturated aikyi; C2 3 alkenyi; C2.3 alkynyl; cyclopropyi; phenyl, which phenyl is optionally substituted by a group selected from halo, methyl, rnethoxy; pyridyi; and thiophenyl; (ig) halo; when there is a single bond present between C2 and C3,

R2 is , where R and R 6 are independently selected from H, F, C - saturated aikyi, C 3 alkenyi, which a ky and alkenyi groups are optionally substituted by a group selected from C .4 alkyl a id and C .. aikyi ester; or, when one of R and R is H, the other is selected from nitriie and a C - alkyl ester; D represents either gro D'1 or D'2:

D'1 D'2 wherein the dotted line indicates the optional presence of a double bond between C2' and C3'; R6 and R9 are independently selected from H, R, OH, OR, SH, SR, NH , NHR, NRR"

0 , e3Sn and halo; 7 R is independently selected from H , R , OH, OR, SH, SR, NH2, NHR, NRR', N0 2,

e3Sn and halo; Y is selected from formulae A 1, A2, A3, A4, A5 and A6:

(A5) (A6)

L is a linker connected to a ce l binding agent; CBA is the cell binding agent;

n is an integer selected in the range of 0 to 48;

R is a C _ alkylene group; either

(a) R is H , and R is OH, OR , where R is alkyl; or (b) R i and R form a nitrogen-carbon double bond between the nitrogen and carbon atoms to which they are bound; or (c) R 0 is H and R is OSO M , where z is 2 or 3 and M is a monovalent pharmaceutically acceptable cation; R and R' are each independently selected from optionally substituted C . 2 alkyl,

C3-20 heterocycly! and C5-20 ary! groups, and optionally in relation to the group RR R and R together with the nitrogen atom to which they are attached form an optionally substituted 4-, 5-, 6- or 7-membered heterocyclic ring; wherein R 6 , R 7, R , R20, R2 and R22 are as defined for R , R7, R9, R 0 , R and R2 respectively; wherein Z is CH or N ;

wherein T and are independently selected from a single bond or a C -9 alkylene. which chain may be interrupted by one or more heteroatoms e.g. O, 8 , N(H), N e, provided that the number of atoms in the shortest chain of atoms between X and X' is 3 to 12 atoms: X and X' are independently selected from O, S and N(H); except that there cannot be double bonds between both C2 and C3 and C2' and C3'.

Thus formula A is selected from the following formulae A-!, A- , A-lii, A- V, A-V and A-V depending on Y:

A second aspect of the present invention provides novel drug-linker compounds of formula (B):

Where a l the groups are as defined in the first aspect of the invention; and Y is selected from a group of formulae B1, B2, B3, B4, B5 and B6;

(B5) (B6) where G is a reactive group for connecting to a ceil binding agent.

A third aspect of the present invention provides compounds of formula (C) which may be used in the preparation of the compounds and conjugate compounds of the invention: where Y is selected from a group of formulae C 1, C2, C3, C4, C5 and C6:

(C1) (C2)

(C3) (C4)

(C5) (C6) either

30 3 (a) R is H , and R is OH, OR , where R is C - aikyi; or (b) R30 and R3 form a nitrogen-carbon double bond between the nitrogen and carbon atoms to which they are bound; or (c) R is H and R3 is OSO M , where z is 2 or 3 and M is a monovalent pharmaceutically acceptable cation; or (d) R30 is a nitrogen protecting group and R is OProt°, where Prot° is a hydroxy protecting group; and R and R4 are as defined for R30 and R3 respectively; and all the remaining groups are as defined in the first aspect of the invention.

A fourth aspect of the present invention provides compounds of formuia (D) which may be used in the reparation of the compounds of the second and third aspects of the invention:

(D4) (D6) and all the remaining groups are as defined in the third aspect of the invention.

A fifth aspect of the present invention provides compounds of formula (E) which may be used in the preparation of the compounds of the second, third and fourth aspects of the invention: Y is selected from a grou of formulae E 1, E2 and E5:

(E2)

(E5) where R is selected from H and TMS;

R 2 is selected from Br, C and ; and all the remaining groups are as defined in the third aspect of the invention.

A sixth aspect of the present invention provides the use of a compound of the first aspect of the invention in a method of medical treatment. The fourth aspect also provides a pharmaceutical composition comprising a compound of the first aspect, and a pharmaceutically acceptable excipient.

A seventh aspect of the present invention provides a compound of the first aspect of the invention or a pharmaceutical composition of the fourth aspect of the invention for use in a method of treatment of a proliferative disease. The fifth aspect also provides the use of a compound of the first aspect in a method of manufacture of a medicament for the treatment of a proliferative disease, and a method of treating a mamma! having a proliferative disease, comprising administering an effective amount of a compound of the first aspect or a pharmaceutical composition of the fourth aspect. A eight aspect of the present invention provides a method of synthesis of a compound of the first aspect of the present invention, comprising the step of conjugating a drug-linker of the second aspect with a cell-binding agent.

The present invention also provides the synthesis of compounds of the second aspect of the invention from compounds of the third, foruth or fifth aspect of the invention by reacting them with suitable reagents.

Detailed Description of the Invention The present invention provides a conjugate comprising a PBD dimer connected through the dimer bridging portion via a specified linker to a cell binding agent.

The present invention is suitable for use in providing a PBD conjugate to a preferred site in a subject.

Nitrogen protecting groups Nitrogen protecting groups are well known in the art. Preferred nitrogen protecting groups for use in the present invention are carbamate protecting groups thai have the genera! formula:

wherein R' is an optionally substituted a ky (e.g. C -2 o alkyl), aryi (e.g. C5..20 a ) or heteroaryi (e.g. C3-20 heterocycly!) group.

A large number of possible carbamate nitrogen protecting groups are listed on pages 706 to 772 of Greene's Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, 4 h Edition, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., 2007 ( SBN 978-0-471-69754-1), which is incorporated herein by reference.

Particularly preferred protecting groups include Alloc, Troc, Teoc, BOC, TcBOC, Frnoc, 1- Adoc and 2-Adoc.

Hydroxy! protecting groups

Hydroxy! protecting groups are well known in the art. A large number of suitable groups are described on pages 24 to 298 of of Greene's Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, 4 h Edition, John Wiley & Sons, inc., 2007 (ISBN 978-0-471-69754-1), which is incorporated herein by reference.

Classes of particular interest include siiy! ethers, methyl ethers, aiky ethers, benzyl ethers, esters, benzoates, carbonates, and sulfonates. Particularly preferred hydroxy! protecting groups include THP.

Preferences The following preferences may apply to all aspects of the invention as described above, or may relate to a single aspect. The preferences may be combined together in any combination.

R2 2 When R is a C5- 0 ary group, in some embodiments it may be a C5. aryl group. A C5.7 aryi group may be a phenyl group or a C .7 heteroaryl group, for example furanyl, thiophenyl and pyridyl. In some embodiments, R2 may be phenyl. In other embodiments, R2 may be thiophenyl, for example, thiophen -2-yi and thiophen-3-yl.

2 When R is a C5- o aryl group, it some embodiments t may be a C8- o ary , for example a quinolinyi or isoquinolinyl group. The quinoiinyl or isoquinolinyl group may be bound to the PBD core through any available ring position. For example, the quinoiinyl may be quinoiin -2- y , quino!in-3-yl, quino!in-4yl, quinolin-5-yi, quinolin-6-yi, quinoiin-7-yl and quinolin-8-yl. Of these quinoiin-3-y! and quino!in-6-yl may be preferred. The isoquinolinyl may be isoquinoiin- 1-yl, isoquinolin-3-yl, isoquinolin-4yl, isoquinolin-5-yi, isoquinoiin-6-yl, isoquinoIin-7-yl and isoquinolin-8-yl. Of these isoquinolin-3-yi and isoquino!in-6-yl may be preferred.

2 When R is a C5 aryl group, it may bear any number of substituenf groups. n some embodiments, it may bear from 1 to 3 substituent groups n some embodiments, it may bear 1 or 2 substituent groups. In some embodiments, it may bear a single substituenf group. The substituents may be any position.

2 Where R is C - aryl group, in some embodiments a single substituent may be on a ring atom that is not adjacent the bond to the remainder of the compound, i.e. it may be β or y to the bond to the remainder of the compound. Therefore, in embodiments where the C5..7 aryl group is phenyl, the substituent may be in the meta- or para- positions, or may be in the para- position.

Where R 2 is a C -i ar group, for example quinolinyl or isoquinolinyl, in some embodiments there may be any number of substituents at any position of the quino!ine or isoquino!ine rings. In some embodiments, it bears one, two or three substituents, and these may be on either the proximal and distal rings or both (if more than one substituent).

2 R substituents, when R is a C5.1 aryl group

2 2 in embodiments where a substituent on R when R is a C - aryl group is ha o, it may be F or C , and in some of these embodiments C

2 2 in embodiments where a substituent on R when R is a C 5- group is ether, it may in some embodiments be an aikoxy group, for example, a C -7 aikoxy group (e.g. methoxy, ethoxy) or it may in some embodiments be a C . aryioxy group (e.g phenoxy, pyridy!oxy, furanyioxy). The aikoxy group may itself be further substituted, for example by an amino group (e.g. dimethylamino).

2 2 in embodiments where a substituent on R when R is is a C 5 0 aryl group is C - alkyl, it may be a alkyl group (e.g. methyl, ethyl, propryl, butyl).

in embodiments where a substituent on R 2 when R 2 is a C 5-1 aryl group is C 3- heterocyclyi, it may be C nitrogen containing heterocyclyi group, e.g. morpholino, thiomorpholino, piperidinyl, piperazinyl. These groups may be bound to the rest of the PBD moiety via the nitrogen atom. These groups may be further substituted, for example, by C . alkyl groups. f the C nitrogen containing heterocyclyi group is piperazinyl, the said further substituent may be on the second nitrogen ring atom.

in embodiments where a substituent on R 2 when R 2 is a C5-10 aryl group is bis-oxy-C i-3 a!ky!ene, this may be bis-oxy-methyiene or bis-oxy-ethyiene.

in embodiments where a substituent on R 2 when R 2 is a C s- aryl group is ester, th s is preferably methyl ester or ethyl ester. 2 in some embodiments, substituents when R is a C5-10 ary group may include methoxy, eihoxy, fiuoro, chioro, cyano, bis-oxy-meihylene, methyi-piperazinyl, morphoiino, methy!- thiopheny!, dimethylaminopropyloxy and carboxy. in some embodiments, R2 may be selected from 4-methoxy-phenyl, 3-methoxyphenyi, 4- ethoxy-phenyl, 3-ethoxy-phenyl, 4-fluoro-phenyi, 4-chloro-phenyl, 3,4-bisoxymethy!ene- phenyi, 4-methylthiophenyl, 4-cyanophenyi, 4-phenoxyphenyi, quinolin-3-yl and quinolin-< isoquinoiin-3-yi and isoquinoiin-6-yi, 2-thienyi, 2-furanyl, methoxynaphthy naphthy!, 4- nitrophenyl. 4-(4-meihy!piperazin-1 -yI)phenyl and 3,4-bisoxymethylene-phenyl.

2 When R is C - saturated aliphatic alkyi, it may be methyl ethyl, propyl, butyl or pentyi . In some embodiments, it may be methyl, ethyl or propyl (n-pentyl or isopropyi). In some of these embodiments, it may be methyl. In other embodiments, it may be butyl or pentyi, which may be linear or branched.

When R2 is C . saturated cycloalkyl, it may be cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyc!opentyi or cyclohexyi. In some embodiments, it may be cyclopropyl.

When R2 is , in some embodiments, the total number of carbon atoms in the group s no more than 4 or no more than 3. in some embodiments, one of R3 , R 2 and R3 is H, with the other two groups being selected from H, C 1.3 saturated alkyi, C2.3 aikenyl, C2.3 aikynyi and cyclopropyl .

In other embodiments, two of R R32 and R33 are H , with the other group being selected from H, C 3 saturated a ky , C 3 aikenyl, G -3 aikynyi and cyclopropyl .

In some embodiments, the groups that are not H are selected from methyl and ethyl some of these embodiments, the groups that are not H are methyl.

In some embodiments, R i is H. in some embodiments, R32 is H.

In some embodiments, R is H. in some embodiments, R and R 2 are H.

n some embodiments, R3 and R33 are H. in some embodiments, R32 and R33 are H.

A R2 group of particular interest is:

„35b

.,35a When R2 is ' in some embodiments, the group (R or R ) which s not H is optionally substituted phenyl. If the phenyl optional substituent s halo, it may be fluoro. In some embodiment, the phenyl group is unsubstituted .

When R2 is in some embodiments where R34 is phenyl, it is unsubstituted. in other embodiments, the phenyl group bears a single fiuoro substitueni. in other emboidments, R 4 is selected from H, methyl, ethyi, etheny! and ethynyl. In some of these embodiments, R 4 is selected from H and methyl.

When R is halo, in some embodiments, it is fluoro.

When there is a single bond present between C2 and C3, R in some embodiments, R3 and R are both H.

In other embodiments, R a and R are both methyl. in further embodiments, one of R a and R is H , and the other is seiected from C saturated aikyi, C2.3 alkenyi, which aikyi and alkenyi groups are optionally substituted. In some of these further embodiment the group which is not H may be seiected from methyl and ethyl

The above preferences for R2 when there is a double bond present between C2 and C3 apply equally to R22 when there is a double bond present between C2' and C3'.

The above preferences for R2 when there is a single bond present between C2 and C3 apply equally to R22, when there is a single bond present between C2' and C3'.

As described above, there cannot be double bonds between both C2 and C3 and C2' and C3' .

R in one embodiment, R is independently selected from H. R, OH, OR, SH, SR, NH NHR,

NRR', N0 2, e3Sn- and Halo.

6 in one embodiment, R is independently selected from H, OH, OR. SH, NH2, N0 2 and Halo in one embodiment, R6 is independently selected from H and Halo in one embodiment, R6 is independently H.

6 7 in one embodiment, R and R together form a group -0 -{CH2) -Q-, where p is 1 or 2 .

These embodiments also apply to R .

R 7 7 R is independently selected from H, R, OH, OR, SH, SR, NH2, NHR, NRR', N0 , Me3Sn and halo. in one embodiment, R is independently OR. in one embodiment, R 7 is independently OR' , where R is independently optionally substituted - aikyi. in one embodiment, R is independently optionally substituted saturated C - aikyi. ' n one embodiment, R' is independently optionally substituted C2. alkenyi. In one embodiment, R'' is independently Me. in one embodiment, R is independentiy CH Ph in one embodiment, R'' is independentiy a y .

These embodiments aiso appiy to R17 .

R 9 in one embodiment. R is independentiy selected from H, R, OH. OR, SH, SR, NH2, NHR,

NRR", NQ , e3Sn- and Haio. in one embodiment, R is independentiy H. in one embodiment, R is independentiy R or OR.

These embodiments also appiy to R .

N10-C1 1

0 in some embodiments, R is H , and R is OH, R' where R is C -4 a ky . in some of these embodiments, R is OH. in others of these embodiments, R is OR' where R is

C .4 aikyi. In some of these embodiments, R is methyi. in some embodiments, R 0 and R form a nitrogen-carbon double bond between the nitrogen and carbon atoms to which they are bound. in some embodiments, R 0 is H and R is OSO M , where z is 2 or 3 and M is a monovalent pharmaceutically acceptable cation . In some of these embodiments, M is a monovalent pharmaceutically acceptable cation, and may be Na '. Furthermore, in some embodiments z is 3 .

The above preferences apply equally to R2 and R2 .

30 3 in some embodiments, R is H , and R is OH, OR , where R is C aikyi. In some of these embodiments, R is OH. in others of these embodiments, R3 is OR , where R is

C . aikyi. In some of these embodiments, R is methyi. in some embodiments, R3 and R3 form a nitrogen-carbon double bond between the nitrogen and carbon atoms to which they are bound. in some embodiments, R3 is H and R3 is OSO , where z is 2 or 3 and M is a monovalent pharmaceutically acceptable cation . In some of these embodiments, is a monovalent pharmaceutically acceptable cation, and may be Na+. Furthermore, in some embodiments z is 3 . in some embodiments, R30 is a nitrogen protecting group and R3 is OPro , where Prot° is a hydroxy protecting group. in some of these embodiments, the nitrogen protecting group may be selected from Alloc, Troc, Teoc, BOC, TcBOC, Fmoc, -Adoc and 2-Adoc, and more preferably be Boc.

In some of these embodiments, the nitrogen protecting group may be ΤΉ Ρ .

For compounds of formula D, it may be preferred that R and R form a nitrogen-carbon double bond between the nitrogen and carbon atoms to which they are bound .

For compounds of formula E, it may be preferred that RM is a nitrogen protecting group and R3 is OProt°, where Prot° is a hydroxy protecting group.

For compounds of formula C. where Yc is of formula C2, C3 or C4, it may be preferred that R30 and R3 form a nitrogen-carbon double bond between the nitrogen and carbon atoms to which they are bound.

For compounds of formula C, where Y is of formula C 1 or C5, it may be preferred that is a nitrogen protecting group and R3 is OProt°, where Prot° is a hydroxy protecting group.

The above preferences apply equally to R4 and R i .

and Γ Each of T and T is independently selected from a single bond or a alkyiene group, which chain may be interrupted by one or more heteroatoms, e.g. O, S, N(H) and/or N e, provided that the number of atoms in the shortest chain of atoms between X and X' is 3 to 12 atoms in one embodiment, each alkyiene group of T and is optionally interrupted by one or more heteroatoms selected from O, S, and NMe. in one embodiment, each of T and T" is independently selected from a single bond and a Ci aikyiene group.

In one embodiment, T is selected from a single bond, Ci, C2, C3 and a C aikyiene group and

is selected from a single bond, C , C , C3 and a C aikyiene group. in one embodiment, T is selected from a single bond, Ci, and a C2 aikyiene group and T is selected from a single bond, Ci, and a C2 aikyiene group. in one embodiment. T is selected from a single bond and a C aikyiene group and is selected from a single bond and a C-. aikyiene group in one embodiment, T is a single bond and T is a single bond. in one embodiment, T is a C aikyiene group and is a aikyiene group in some embodiments, T and T' are the same.

The aikyiene groups listed above may be optionally interrupted by one or more heteroatoms. The aikyiene groups listed above may be unsubststuted linear aliphatic aikyiene groups.

X in one embodiment, X is selected from O, S, or N(H) Preferably, X is O.

Dimers in some embodiments the groups R22. R , R 7, R , R2 and R2 are the same as the groups R2, R , R , R7, R 0 and R respectively n these embodiments, the PBD monomer units have the same substituents.

Particularly preferred compounds of the first aspect of the present invention may be of formula a:

where R 0 , R , R20, R2 and Y are as defined above;

and t2 are an independently selected from 0, 1 and 2; R'3 and R ' 3 are independently selected from methyl and phenyl; R ependently selected from:

(b)

These compounds may preferably be symmetrical

Particularly preferred compounds of the second aspect of the present invention may be of formula a:

where R10 , R . R20, R2 and Y are as defined above; and t are an independently selected from 0, 1 and 2; R73 and Ri are independently selected from methyl and phenyl; R ependently selected from:

(b)

(c)

(f)

These compounds may preferably be symmetrical.

Particularly preferred compounds of the third aspect of the present invention may be of formula l a:

where

'°, R . R2 , R and Yc are as defined above;

i and t2 are an independently selected from 0, 1 and 2; R and R 7 are independently selected from methyl and phenyl: ependently selected from

These compounds may preferably be symmetrical. n (V, Y ) In some embodiments, n (in Y or Y ) is an integer between 0 and 24. in some embodiments, n (in Y or Y ) is an integer between 0 and 12. in some embodiments, n (in Y or Y ) is an integer between 0 and 8. in some embodiments, n (in Y or Y ) is an integer between 0 and 6.

In some embodiments, n (in Y or Y ) is 0. n some embodiments, n (in Y or Y ) is . In some embodiments, n (in Y or Y ) is 2. In some embodiments, n (in Y or Y ) is 3. in some embodiments, n (i Y or Y ) is 4. n some embodiments, n (in Y or Y ) is 5 n some embodiments, n (in Y or Y -) is 6. n some embodiments, n (in Y or YL) is 7. n some embodiments, n (in Y or YL) is 8. n some embodiments, n (in Y or Y ) is 9. n some embodiments, n 'in Y or Y ) is 10 n some embodiments, n (in Y or YL) is 11 n some embodiments, n (in Y or Y ) is 12 n some embodiments, n (in Y or Y ) is 13 n some embodiments, n in Y or Y ) is 14 n some embodiments, n Ί η Y or Y -) is 15

in some embodiments when Y is A 1, or Y is B 1, n may be selected from 3 and 6. in some embodiments when Y is A2, or Y is B2, n may be selected from 4 and 6. in some embodiments when Y is A3, or Y is B3, n may be 4. in some embodiments when Y is A4, or Y is B4, n may be 4. in some embodiments when Y is A5 or Y is B5 n may be 1 . in some embodiments when Y is A6, or Y is B6, n may be 2.

and G L is a linker connected to the eel! binding agent in the conjugate conmpound. G is a reactive group for connecting the PBD aimer to the ceil binding agent to form the conjugate compound.

Preferably, the linker/reactive group contains an electrophilic functional group for reaction with a nucieophilic functional group on the cell binding agent. Nucleophilic groups on antibodies include, but are not limited to: (i) N-terminal amine groups, (ii) side chain amine groups, e.g. lysine, (iii) side chain thiol groups, e.g. cysteine, and (iv) sugar hydroxyl or amino groups where the antibody is glycosylated. Amine, thiol, and hydroxyl groups are nucieophiiic and capable of reacting to form covaient bonds with electrophilic groups on linker moieties and linker reagents including: (i) maleimide groups (ii) activated disulfides, (iii) active esters such as NHS (N-hydroxysuccinimide) esters, HOBt (N-hydroxybenzotriazoie) esters, haioformates, and acid haiides; (iv) a ky and benzyi haiides such as haloacetamsdes; nd (v) aldehydes, ketones, carboxy!, and, some of which are exemplified as foliows:

Certain antibodies have reducible interchain disulfides, i.e. cysteine bridges. Antibodies may be made reactive for conjugation with linker reagents by treatment with a reducing agent such as DTT (dithiothreitol). Each cysteine bridge wii thus form, theoretically, two reactive thiol nucleophiles. Additional nucieophiiic groups can be introduced into antibodies through the reaction of lysines with 2-iminoihio!ane (Traut's reagent) resulting in conversion of an amine into a thiol. Reactive thiol groups may be introduced into the antibody (or fragment thereof) by introducing one, two, three, four, or more cysteine residues (e.g., preparing mutant antibodies comprising one or more non-native cysteine amino acid residues). US 7521541 teaches engineering antibodies by introduction of reactive cysteine amino acids. in some embodiments, a Linker has a reactive nucieophiiic group which is reactive with an eiectrophiiic group present on an antibody. Useful e!ectrophi!ic groups on an antibody include, but are not limited to, aldehyde and ketone carbonyl groups. The heteroatom of a nucieophiiic group of a Linker can react with an eiectrophiiic group on an antibody and form a covaient bond to an antibody unit. Useful nucieophiiic groups on a Linker include, but are not limited to, hydrazide. oxime, amino, hydroxy!, hydrazine, thiosemicarbazone, hydrazine carboxylate, and arylhydrazide. The eiectrophiiic group on an antibody provides a convenient site for attachment to a Linker. in one embodiment, the group L is:

where the asterisk indicates the point of attachment to the rest of group Y, the wavy line indicates the point of attachment to the cell binding agent, and is an integer selected from the range 0 to 6. In one embodiment, m is selected from 2, 3, 4 and 5.

In one embodiment, the connection between the cell binding agent and L is through a thiol residue of the eel binding agent and a maleimide group of L . in one embodiment, the connection between the cell binding agent and L is:

where the asterisk indicates the point of attachment to the remaining portion of the L group or the remaining portion of the Y group and the wavy line indicates the point of attachment to the remaining portion of the ceil binding agent. In this embodiment, the S atom is typically derived from the cell binding agent.

In each of the embodiments above, an alternative functionality may be used in place of the ma!eimide-derived group shown below:

where the wavy line indicates the point of attachment to the ceil binding agent as before, and the asterisk indicates the bond to the remaining portion of the L group or the remaining portion of the Y group.

In one embodiment, the maleimide-derived group is replaced with the group: where the wavy line indicates point of attachment to the ceil binding agent, and the asterisk indicates the bond to the remaining portion of the L group or the remaining portion of the Y group. in one embodiment, the maieimide-derived group is replaced with a group, which optionally together with the cell binding agent is selected from: -C(=0)NH-, -C(=0)0-, -NHC(=0)- -OC(=0)-, -OC(=0)0-, -NHC(=0)0-, -OC(=0)NH-, -NHC(=0)NH-, -NHC(=0)NH, -C(=0)NHC(=0)-, -S-,

~CH C(=0)~

=N-NH-, and -NH-N=. in one embodiment, the maieimide-derived group is replaced with a group, which optionally together with the cell binding agent is selected from:

where the wavy line indicates either the point of attachment to the cell binding agent or the bond to the remaining portion of the L group or the remaining portion of the Y group, and the asterisk indicates the other of the point of attachment to the cell binding agent or the bond to the remaining portion of the L group or the remaining portion of the Y group.

Other groups that can be used as L for connecting the remaining portion of the Y group to the ceil binding agent are described in WO 2005/082023.

Thus, in embodiments of the present invention, L is of formula:

-L"-(CH )m- Where m is from 0 to 6; and L is selected from: where Ar represents a C - arylene group, e.g. phenyiene.

In some embodiments where L is L 1, m may be 2, 3 or 5.

in some embodiments where L is L , L may be L .

n embodiments of the present invention, L is of formula: -L -(CH )m-0- (L2) Where m is from 0 to 6; and L is selected from the groups above.

Without wishing to be bound by theory, such a group may be cleaved from the antibody such that the carbamate group yields a terminal amine. in some embodiments where L is L2, L may be L 3 .

In some embodiments where L is L2, m may be 1.

In embodiments of the present invention, L is of formula :

-L -(CH2)q-0-C(=0)-NH-(CH2)p- (L3) Where q is from 1 to 3, and p is from 1 to 3; and L is selected from the groups above.

Without wishing to be bound by theory, such a group may be cleaved from the antibody such that the carbamate group yields the group: H N~(CH ) - (L3 ).

In some embodiments where L is L3, q may be 1, and p may be 2. in some embodiments where L is L3, L may be selected from L 7, L 1 and in embodiments of the resent invention, L is of formula:

Where m is from 0 to 6; X1 and X2 are amino acid groups, selected from natural amino acids, which may be modified; L is selected from the groups above.

The natural amino acids may be seiected such that the dipeptide group is cathpesin labile. in one embodiment, the group ~X -X - is selected from: -Phe-Lys-, -Va!-A!a-, -Vai-Lys-, -Aia-Lys-, -Val-Cit-, -Phe-Cit-, -Leu-Cit-, -lie-Cit-, -Phe-Arg-, -Trp-Cit- where Cit is citrulline.

Preferably, the group -X,-X ,- is selected from: -Phe-Lys-, -Vai-Aia-, -Vai-Lys-, -Ala-Lys-, -Val-Cit-.

Most preferably, the group -Xi-X 2- is -Phe-Lys- or -Vai-Aia-.

In some embodiments where L is L4, m may be 1.

Other dipeptide combinations may be used, including those described by Dubowchik et a ., Bioconjugate Chemistry, 2002, 13,855-869, which is incorporated herein by reference. in one embodiment, the amino acid side chain is derivatised, where appropriate. For example, an amino group or carboxy group of an amino acid side chain may be derivatised. in one embodiment, an amino group NH2 of a side chain amino acid, such as lysine, is a derivatised form selected from the group consisting of NHR and NRR'. one embodiment, a carboxy group COOH of a side chain amino acid, such as aspartic acid, is a derivatised form selected from the group consisting of COOR, CONH 2, CONHR and CONRR'. in one embodiment, the amino acid side chain is chemically protected, where appropriate.

The side chain protecting group may be a group as discussed beiow in relation to the group R . The present inventors have established that protected amino acid sequences are cleavable by enzymes. For example it has been established that a dipeptide sequence comprising a Boc side chain-protected Lys residue is cleavable by cathepsin.

Protecting groups for the side chains of amino acids are well known in the art and are described in the Novabiochem Catalog. Additional protecting group strategies are set out in Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, Greene and Wuts.

Possible side chain protecting groups are shown below for those amino acids having reactive side chain functionality: Arg: Z , Mtr, Tos; Asn: Tr , Xan; Asp: Bz , t-Bu; Cys: Acm, Bz , Bzl-OMe, Bzi-Me, Trt; Giu: Bzl, t-Bu; Gin: Trt, Xan; His: Boc, Dnp, Tos, Trt; Lys: Boc, Z-Ci, Fmoc, Z, Alloc; Ser: Bzl, TBDMS, TBDPS; Thr: Bz; Trp: Boc; Tyr: Bzl, Z, Z-Br.

Thus, in embodiments of the present invention, G is of formula:

G -(CH )m- Where is from 0 to 6; and G is selected from: where Ar represents a C - arylene group, e.g. phenyiene.

In some embodiments where G Is G 1, m may be 2, 3 or 5.

In some embodiments where G is Gl G may be G . in embodiments of the present invention, G is of formula

G -(CH2)m-0- (G2) Where m is from 0 to 6; and G is selected from the groups above.

In some embodiments where G is G2, G may be G 3 2. in some embodiments where G is G2, m may be 1. in embodiments of the present invention, G is of formula:

G -(CH )q-0-C(=0)-NH-(CH ) - (L3) Where q is from 1 to 3, and p is from 1 to 3; and G is selected from the groups above.

in some embodiments where G is G3, q may be 1, and p may be 2. in some embodiments where G is G3, G may be selected from G and G' in embodiments of the resent invention, G is of formula:

Where m is from 0 to 6; X1 and X2 are as defined above for L4; G is selected from the groups above. R and R '

In one embodiment, R is independently selected from optionally substiiuted C - 2 a ky ,

C3-20 heterocyclyl and C5-20 aryi groups. These groups are each defined in the substituents section below. in one embodiment, R is independently optionally substituted C 2 aiky!. in one embodiment, R s independently optionally substituted C3-20 heterocyclyl

in one embodiment, R is independently optionally substituted C5-20 aryi.

n one embodiment, R is independently optionally substituted C - 2 a!kyi

The preferences for R apply aiso to R in some embodiments of the invention there is provided a compound having a substituent group -NRR'. In one embodiment, R and R' together w th the nitrogen atom to which they are attached form an optionally substituted 4-, 5-, 6- or 7-membered heterocyciic ring. The ring may contain a further heteroatom, for example N , O or S. in one embodiment, the heterocyclic ring is itself substituted with a group R. Where a further N heteroatom is present, the substituent may be on the N heteroatom

in one embodiment, R is a C 4 aikyiene group in one embodiment, R is a C2 aikyiene group in one embodiment, R is a C?, aikyiene group. in one embodiment, R is an unsubstituted C aikyiene group in one embodiment, R is a linear C ..6 aikyiene group.

In one embodiment, R is selected from the group consisting of-CH 2CH2-, -CH CH2CH2- and -~CH CH CH CH2 Cell Binding Agent A ceil binding agent may be of any kind, and include peptides and non-peptides. These can include antibodies or a fragment of an antibody that contains at least one binding site, lymphokines, hormones, growth factors, nutrient-transport molecules, or any other cell binding molecule or substance.

The term "antibody" herein is used in the broadest sense and specifically covers monoclonal antibodies, polyclonal antibodies, dinners, rnulfirners, multispecific antibodies (e.g., bispecific antibodies), and antibody fragments, so long as they exhibit the desired biological activity (Miller etal (2003) Jour of Immunology 170:4854-4861). Antibodies may be murine, human, humanized, chimeric, or derived from other species. An antibody is a protein generated by the immune system that is capable of recognizing and binding to a specific antigen. (Janeway. C , Travers, P., Walport, ., Shiomchik (2001) !mmuno Biology, 5th Ed., Garland Publishing, New York). A target antigen generally has numerous binding sites, also called epitopes, recognized by CDRs on multiple antibodies. Each antibody that specifically binds to a different epitope has a different structure. Thus, one antigen may have more than one corresponding antibody. An antibody includes a full-length immunoglobulin molecule or an immunologically active portion of a full-length immunoglobulin molecule, i.e., a molecule that contains an antigen binding site that imrnunospecificaily binds an antigen of a target of interest or part thereof, such targets including but not limited to, cancer cell or cells that produce autoimmune antibodies associated with an autoimmune disease. The immunoglobulin can be of any type (e.g. IgG, IgE, g , gD and gA ), class (e.g. IgG1, lgG2, igG3, igG4, lgA1 and lgA2) or subclass of immunoglobulin molecule. The immunoglobulins can be derived from any species, including human, murine, or rabbit origin.

"Antibody fragments" comprise a portion of a full length antibody, generally the antigen binding or variable region thereof. Examples of antibody fragments include Fab, Fab',

F(ab')2, and Fv fragments; diabodies; linear antibodies; fragments produced by a Fab expression library, anti-idiotypic (anti-id) antibodies, CDR (complementary determining region), and epitope-binding fragments of any of the above which imrnunospecificaily bind to cancer ce l antigens, viral antigens or microbial antigens, single-chain antibody molecules; and multispecific antibodies formed from antibody fragments.

The term "monoclonal antibody" as used herein refers to an antibody obtained from a population of substantially homogeneous antibodies, i.e. the individual antibodies comprising the population are identical except for possible naturally occurring mutations that may be present in minor amounts. Monoclonal antibodies are highly specific, being directed against a single antigenic site. Furthermore, in contrast to polyclonal antibody preparations which include different antibodies directed against different determinants (epitopes), each monoclonal antibody is directed against a single determinant on the antigen. In addition to their specificity, the monoclonal antibodies are advantageous in that they may be synthesized uncontaminated by other antibodies. The modifier "monoclonal" indicates the character of the antibody as being obtained from a substantially homogeneous population of antibodies, and is not to be construed as requiring production of the antibody by any particular method. For example, the monoclonal antibodies to be used in accordance with the present invention may be made by the hybridoma method first described by Kohier et al (1975) Nature 256:495, or may be made by recombinant DNA methods (see, US 4816567). The monoclonal antibodies may also be isolated from phage antibody libraries using the techniques described in Clackson et a (1991) Nature, 352:624-628; Marks et a (1991) J. Mol. Bio!., 222:581-597.

The monoclonal antibodies herein specifically include "chimeric" antibodies in which a portion of the heavy and/or light chain is identical with or homologous to corresponding sequences in antibodies derived from a particular species or belonging to a particular antibody class or subclass, while the remainder of the chain(s) is identical with or homologous to corresponding sequences in antibodies derived from another species or belonging to another antibody class or subclass, as well as fragments of such antibodies, so long as they exhibit the desired biological activity (US 4816567; and Morrison et al (1984) Proc. Nat Acad. Sci. USA, 81:6851-6855). Chimeric antibodies include "primatized" antibodies comprising variable domain antigen-binding sequences derived from a non- human primate (e.g. Old World Monkey or Ape) and human constant region sequences.

An Intact antibody" herein is one comprising a VL and VH domains, as well as a light chain constant domain (CL) and heavy chain constant domains, CH1, CH2 and CHS. The constant domains may be native sequence constant domains (e.g. human native sequence constant domains) or amino acid sequence variant thereof. The intact antibody may have one or more "effector functions" which refer to those biological activities attributable to the Fc region (a native sequence Fc region or amino acid sequence variant Fc region) of an antibody. Examples of antibody effector functions include C1q binding; complement dependent cytotoxicity; Fc receptor binding; antibody-dependent cell-mediated cytotoxicity (ADCC); phagocytosis; and down regulation of cell surface receptors such as B ceil receptor and BCR. Depending on the amino acid sequence of the constant domain of their heavy chains, intact antibodies can be assigned to different "classes." There are five major classes of intact antibodies: IgA, gD, IgE, gG, and gM, and several of these may be further divided into "subclasses" (isotypes), e.g., igG1, igG2, !gG3, lgG4, IgA, and lgA2. The heavy-chain constant domains that correspond to the different classes of antibodies are called , δ, ε, γ , and µ, respectively. The subunit structures and three-dimensional configurations of different classes of immunoglobulins are well known.

Examples of ce l binding agents include those agents described for use in WO 2007/085930, which is incorporated herein.

The cell binding agent may be, or comprise, a polypeptide. The poiypeptide may be a cyclic polypeptide. The cell binding agent may be antibody. Thus, in one embodiment, the present invention provides an antibody-drug conjugate (ADC).

Drug loading The drug loading is the average number of PBD drugs per antibody. Drug loading may range from 1 to 8 drugs (D) per antibody (Ab), i.e. where 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 , 7, and 8 drug moieties are covalentiy attached to the antibody. Compositions of ADC include coliections of antibodies conjugated with a range of drugs, from 1 to 8. The average number of drugs per antibody in preparations of ADC from conjugation reactions may be characterized by conventional means such as mass spectroscopy, ELiSA assay, electrophoresis, and HPLC.

The quantitative distribution of ADC in terms of p may also be determined. By ELiSA, the averaged value of p in a particular preparation of ADC may be determined (Hambiett et a (2004) C in. Cancer Res. 10:7063-7070; Sanderson et al (2005) Clin. Cancer Res. 11:843- 852). However, the distribution of p (drug) values is not discernible by the antibody-antigen binding and detection limitation of ELiSA. Also, ELISA assay for detection of antibody-drug conjugates does not determine where the drug moieties are attached to the antibody, such as the heavy chain or light chain fragments, or the particular amino acid residues in some instances, separation, purification, and characterization of homogeneous ADC where p is a certain value from ADC with other drug loadings may be achieved by means such as reverse phase HPLC or electrophoresis.

For some antibody-drug conjugates, p may be limited by the number of attachment sites on the antibody. For example, an antibody may have only one or several cysteine thiol groups, or may have only one or several sufficiently reactive thiol groups through which a linker may be attached. Higher drug loading, e.g. p >5, may cause aggregation, insolubility, toxicity, or loss of cellular permeability of certain antibody-drug conjugates.

Typically, fewer than the theoretical maximum of drug moieties are conjugated to an antibody during a conjugation reaction. An antibody may contain, for example, many lysine residues that do not react with the drug-linker intermediate (D-L) or linker reagent. Only the most reactive lysine groups may react with an amine-reactive linker reagent. Also, only the most reactive cysteine thiol groups may react with a thiol-reactive linker reagent. Generally, antibodies do not contain many, if any, free and reactive cysteine thiol groups which may be linked to a drug moiety. Most cysteine thiol residues in the antibodies of the compounds exist as disulfide bridges and must be reduced with a reducing agent such as dithiothreitol (DTT) o TCEP, under partial or total reducing conditions. The loading (drug/antibody ratio) of an ADC may be controlled in several different manners, including: (i) limiting the molar excess of drug-linker intermediate (D-L) or linker reagent relative to antibody, (ii) limiting the conjugation reaction time or temperature, and (iii) partial or limiting reductive conditions for cysteine thiol modification.

Cysteine amino acids may be engineered at reactive sites in an antibody and which do not form intrachain or intermoiecu!ar disulfide linkages (Junutula, et aL, 2008b Nature Biotech., 26(8):925-932; Dornan et a (2009) Blood 114(13):2721-2729; US 7521541; US 7723485; WO2009/052249, Shen et al (2012) Nature Biotech., 30(2):184-191; Junutula et al (2008) Jour of !mmun. Methods 332:41-52). The engineered cysteine thiols may react with linker reagents or the drug-linker reagents of the present invention which have thiol-reactive, eiectrophiiic groups such as a eimide or alpha-halo amides to form ADC with cysteine engineered antibodies (ThioMabs) and the PBD drug moieties. The location of the drug moiety can thus be designed, controlled, and known. The drug loading can be controlled since the engineered cysteine thioi groups typically react with thiol-reactive linker reagents or drug-linker reagents in high yield. Engineering an gG antibody to introduce a cysteine amino acid by substitution at a single site on the heavy or light chain gives two new cysteines on the symmetrical antibody. A drug loading near 2 can be achieved and near homogeneity of the conjugation product ADC.

Where more than one nucleophilic or eiectrophiiic group of the antibody reacts with a drug- linker intermediate, or linker reagent followed by drug moiety reagent then the resulting product is a mixture of ADC compounds with a distribution of drug moieties attached to an antibody, e.g. 1, 2, 3 , etc. Liquid chromatography methods such as polymeric reverse phase (PLRP) and hydrophobic interaction (H C) may separate compounds in the mixture by drug loading value. Preparations of ADC with a single drug loading value (p) may be isolated, however, these single loading value ADCs may still be heterogeneous mixtures because the drug moieties may be attached, via the linker, at different sites on the antibody.

Thus the antibody-drug conjugate compositions of the invention include mixtures of antibody-drug conjugate compounds where the antibody has one or more PBD drug moieties and where the drug moieties may be attached to the antibody at various amino acid residues.

In one embodiment, the average number of dimer pyrro!obenzodiazepine groups per ceil binding agent is in the range 1 to 20. In some embodiments the range is selected from 1 to 8, 2 to 8, 2 to 6, 2 to 4, and 4 to 8 . in some embodiments, there is one dimer pyrrolobenzodiazepine groups per ceil binding agent.

Peptides in one embodiment, the cell binding agent s a linear or cyclic peptide comprising 4-20, preferably 6-20, contiguous amino acid residues in this embodiment, it is preferred that one cell binding agent is linked to one monomer or dimer pyrrolobenzodiazepine compound. in one embodiment the ceil binding agent comprises a peptide that binds integrin . The peptide may be selective for α β over XYS. in one embodiment the cell binding agent comprises the A20FMDV-Cys polypeptide. The A20FMDV-Cys has the sequence: NAVPNLRGDLQVLAQKVARTC. Alternatively, a variant of the A20FMDV-Cys sequence may be used wherein one, two, three, four, five, six, seven, eight, nine or ten amino acid residues is substituted with another amino acid residue. in one embodiment the antibody is a monoclonal antibody; chimeric antibody; humanized antibody; fully human antibody; or a single chain antibody. One embodiment the antibody is a fragment of one of these antibodies having biological activity. Examples of such fragments include Fab, Fab', F(ab')2 and Fv fragments. in these embodiments, each antibody may be linked to one or several dimer pyrroiobenzodiazepine groups. The preferred ratios of pyrroiobenzodiazepine to ce l binding agent are given above.

The antibody may be a domain antibody (DAB). in one embodi ent the antibody is a monoclonal antibody.

Antibodies for use in the present invention include those antibodies described in WO 2005/082023 which is incorporated herein. Particularly preferred are those antibodies for tumour-associated antigens. Examples of those antigens known in the art include, but are not limited to, those tumour-associated antigens set out in WO 2005/082023. See, for instance, pages 41-55.

The conjugates of the invention are designed to target tumour ceils via their ceil surface antigens. The antigens are usually normal eel! surface antigens which are either over- expressed or expressed at abnormal times ideally the target antigen is expressed only on proliferative cells (preferably tumour cells), however this is rarely observed in practice. As a result, target antigens are usually selected on the basis of differential expression between proliferative and healthy tissue.

Tumor-associated antigens (TAA) are known in the art, and can prepared for use n generating antibodies using methods and information which are well known in the art. in attempts to discover effective cellular targets for cancer diagnosis and therapy, researchers have sought to identify transmembrane or otherwise tumor-associated polypeptides that are specifically expressed on the surface of one or more particular type(s) of cancer cell as compared to on one or more normal non-cancerous cell(s). Often, such tumor-associated polypeptides are more abundantly expressed on the surface of the cancer ceils as compared to on the surface of the non-cancerous cells. The identification of such tumor-associated cell surface antigen polypeptides has given rise to the ability to specifically target cancer ceils for destruction via antibody-based therapies.

Examples of TAA include, but are not limited to, TAA ( 1)-(36) listed below. For convenience, information relating to these antigens, all of which are known in the art, is listed below and includes names, alternative names, Genbank accession numbers and primary reference(s), following nucleic acid and protein sequence identification conventions of the National Center for Biotechnology Information (NCB!). Nucleic acid and protein sequences corresponding to TAA (1)-(36) are available in public databases such as GenBank. Tumor-associated antigens targeted by antibodies include all amino acid sequence variants and isoforms possessing at least about 70%, 80%, 85%, 90%, or 95% sequence identity relative to the sequences identified in the cited references, or which exhibit substantially the same biological properties or characteristics as a TAA having a sequence found in the cited references. For example, a TAA having a variant sequence generally is able to bind specifically to an antibody that binds specifically to the TAA with the corresponding sequence listed. The sequences and disclosure in the reference specifically recited herein are expressly incorporated by reference.

TUMOR-ASSOCIATED ANTIGENS (1)-(36): (1) BMPR1 B (bone morphogenetic protein receptor-type IB, Genbank accession no.

NM 0 203} ten Dijke P., et ai Science 264 (51 55): 101-1 04 (1994), Oncogene 14

( 1 1): 1377-1 382 (1997)); WO2004/063362 (Claim 2); WO2003/042661 (Claim 2);

US2003/134790-A1 (Page 38-39); WO2002/1 02235 (Claim 13; Page 296); WO2003/055443 (Page 91-92); WO2002/99122 (Example 2; Page 528-530); WO2003/029421 (Claim 6);

WO2003/024392 (Claim 2; Fig 1 2); WO2002/98358 (Claim 1; Page 183); WO2002/54940 (Page 100-101); WO2002/59377(Page 349-350); WO2002/30268 (Claim 27; Page 376);

WO2001/48204 (Example; Fig 4); NP__001 194 bone morphogenetic protein receptor, type IB /pid=NP_001 194.1 . Cross-references: IV!!M:603248; NP_001 194.1; AY065994

(2) E16 (LAT1, SLC7A5, Genbank accession no. N 3Q3486) Biochem. Biophys. Res. Commun. 255 (2), 283-288 (1999), Nature 395 (6699):288-291 (1998), Gaugitsch, H.W., et a/ (1992) J. Biol. Chem. 267 (16):1 1267-1 1273); WO2004/048938 (Example 2);

WO2004/032842 (Example V ); WO2003/042661 (Claim 12); WO2003/0 16475 (Claim 1); WO2002/78524 (Example 2); WO2002/99074 (Claim 19; Page 127-129); WO2002/86443 (Claim 27; Pages 222, 393); WO2003/003906 (Claim 10; Page 293); WO2002/64798 (Claim

33; Page 93-95); WO2000/14228 (Claim 5; Page 133-136); US2003/224454 (Fig 3); WO2003/025138 (Claim 12; Page 150); NPJ3G3477 solute carrier family 7 (cationic amino acid transporter, y+system), member 5 /pid=NP_003477.3 - Homo sapiens; Cross- references: MIM:600182; NP... 003477.3; NM_015923; NM... 003486 ... 1

(3) STEAP1 (six transmembrane epithelial antigen of prostate, Genbank accession no.

NM_012449); Cancer Res. 6 1 (15), 5857-5860 (2001), Hubert, R.S., eta! (1999) Proc. Nati. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 96 (25): 14523-1 4528); WO2004/065577 (Claim 6); VYO2004/027049 (Fig 1L); EP1394274 (Example 11); WO2004/016225 (Claim 2); WO2003/042661 (Claim 12); US2003/1 57089 (Example 5); US2003/1 85830 (Example 5); US2003/064397 (Fig 2); WO20G2/89747 (Example 5; Page 618-619); WO2003/022995 (Example 9; Fig 13A, Example 53; Page 173, Example 2; Fig 2A); NP_036581 six transmembrane epithelial antigen of the prostate; Cross-references: MIM:604415; NP_036581.1; NM_012449__1

(4) 0772P (CA125, MUC16, Genbank accession no. AF361486); J. Biol. Chem. 276

(29):27371-27375 (2001 )); WO2004/045553 (Claim 14); WO2002/92836 (Claim 6; Fig 12); WO2002/83866 (Claim 15; Page 16-121); US2003/124140 (Example 16); Cross- references: Gi:34501467; AAK74120.3; AF361486_1

(5) PF ( PF, SLN, S R, megakaryocyte potentiating factor, mesothelin, Genbank accession no. NM_005823) YamaguchL N.. et al Biol. Chem. 269 (2), 805-808 (1994), Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 96 (20):1 1531-1 1536 (1999), Proc. Nat!. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 93

( 1 ): 136-1 0 (1996), J. Biol. Chem. 270 (37):21 984-21 990 (1995)); WO2003/101283 (Claim 14); (WO2002/1 02235 (Claim 13; Page 287-288); WO2002/101075 (Claim 4; Page 308-

309); WO2002/71928 (Page 320-321 ); WO94/10312 (Page 52-57); Cross-references: MIM:601051 ; NP_005814.2; NM_005823_1

(6) Napi3b (NAPI-3B. NaPi2B, NPT b, SLC34A2, solute carrier family 34 (sodium phosphate), member 2, type I sodium-dependent phosphate transporter 3b, Genbank accession no. NM_006424) J. Biol. Chem. 277 (22): 19665-1 9672 (2002), Genomics 62 (2):281-284 (1999), Fei!d, JA , et al (1999) Biochem. Biophys. Res. Commun. 258 (3):578- 582); WO2004/022778 (Claim 2); EP1 394274 (Example 11); WO2002/1 02235 (Claim 13;

Page 326); EP0875569 (Claim 1; Page 17-19); WO2001/57188 (Claim 20; Page 329); WO2004/032842 (Example V); WO2001/75177 (Claim 24; Page 139-140); Cross- references: MIM:604217; NP_006415.1; NM_006424_1 .

(7) Sema 5b (FLJ10372, KIAA1445, Mm.42015, SEMA5B, SEMAG, Semaphorin 5b H og, sema domain, seven thrombospondin repeats (type 1 and type 1-like), transmembrane domain (TM) and short cytoplasmic domain, (semaphorin) 5B, Genbank accession no.

AB040878); Nagase T„ et al (2000) DNA Res. 7 (2):143-150); WO2004/000997 (Claim 1);

WO2003/003984 (Claim 1); WO2002/06339 (Claim 1; Page 50); WO2001/88133 (Claim 1;

Page 41-43, 48-58); WO2003/054152 (Claim 20); WO2003/101400 (Claim 11); Accession: Q9P283; E BL; AB040878; BAA95969.1 . Genew; HGNC: 10737 (8) PSCA h g (2700G50C12Rik, C530008O16Rik, R KEN cDNA 27GG050C12, RIKEN cDNA 2700050C12 gene, Genbank accession no. AY358628); Ross et ai (2002) Cancer Res. 62:2546-2553; US2003/129192 (Claim 2); US2004/044180 (Claim 12); US2004/044179

(Claim 11); US2003/096961 (Claim 11); US2003/232056 (Example 5); WO2003/1 05758 (Claim 12); US2003/206918 (Example 5); EP1347046 (Claim 1); WO2003/025148 (Claim 20); Cross-references: Gi:371 82378; AAQ88991 .1; AY358628J

(9) ETBR (Endothelin type B receptor, Genbank accession no. AY275463); Nakamuta M., ef al Biochem. Biophys. Res. Commun. 177, 34-39, 1991; Ogawa Y., et a! Biochem. Biophys. Res. Commun. 178, 248-255, 1991; Aral H., et a! Jpn. Circ. J. 56, 1303-1307, 1992; Aral H., et ai J. Biol. Chem. 268, 3463-3470, 1993; Sakamoto A., Yanagisawa ., et a Biochem. Biophys. Res. Commun. 178, 656-663, 1991; Elshourbagy N.A., etal J. Biol. Chem. 268, 3873-3879, 1993; Haendler B., et a J Cardiovasc. Pharmacol. 20, e1-S4, 1992; Tsutsumi M., et al Gene 228, 43-49, 1999; Strausberg R.L., et al Proc. Natl. Acad. Sc U.S.A. 99,

16899-16903, 2002; Bourgeois C , et a J. Clin. Endocrinol. Metab. 82, 3 16-3123, 1997; Okamoto Y., et al Biol. Chem. 272, 21589-21596, 1997; Verheij J.B., et al Am. J. Med.

Genet 108, 223-225, 2002; Hofstra R.M.W., et al Eur. J. Hum. Genet. 5 , 180-185, 1997; Puffenberger E.G., etai Ceil 79, 1257-1266, 1994; Attie T., ef al, Hum. Mol. Genet. 4 , 2407- 2409, 1995; Auricchio A., et al Hum. Mol. Genet. 5:351-354, 1996; A ie J., et al Hum. Mol. Genet. 5 , 355-357, 1996; Hofsira R.M.W., et ai Nat. Genet. 12, 445-447, 1996; Svensson P.J., et al Hum. Genet 103, 145-148, 1998; Fuchs S., et al Mol. Med. 7, 115-124, 2001;

Pingault , et al (2002) Hum. Genet 111, 198-206; WO2004/045516 (Claim 1);

WO2004/048938 (Example 2); WO2004/040000 (Claim 151); WO2003/087768 (Claim 1);

WO2003/016475 (Claim 1); WO2003/016475 (Claim 1); WO2002/61087 (Fig 1);

WO2003/0 16494 (Fig 6); WO2003/0251 38 (Claim 12; Page 144); WO2001/98351 (Claim 1;

Page 124-125); EP0522868 (Claim 8; Fig 2); WO2001/77172 (Claim 1; Page 297-299); US2003/1 09676; US6518404 (Fig 3); US5773223 (Claim 1a; Col 31-34); WO2004/001004 (10) SG783 (RNF124, hypothetical protein FLJ20315, Genbank accession no.

NM_017763); WO2003/104275 (Claim 1); WO2004/046342 (Example 2); WO2003/042661

(Claim 12); WO2003/083074 (Claim 14; Page 61); WO2003/018621 (Claim 1); WO2003/024392 (Claim 2; Fig 93); WO2001/66689 (Example 6); Cross-references:

LocuslD:54894; P_.060233.2; NM_017763_1

( 1 1) STEAP2 (HGNC_8639, IPCA-1, PCANAP1 , STAMP1, STEAP2, ST P, prostate cancer associated gene 1, prostate cancer associated protein 1, six transmembrane epithelial antigen of prostate 2, six transmembrane prostate protein, Genbank accession no. AF4551 38); Lab. Invest 82 ( ): 573-1 582 (2002)); WO2003/087306; US2003/064397

(Claim 1; Fig 1); WO2002/72596 (Claim 13; Page 54-55); WO2001 /72962 (Claim 1; Fig 4B);

WO2003/1 04270 (Claim 11); WO2003/1 04270 (Claim 16); US2004/005598 (Claim 22);

WO2003/042661 (Claim 12); US2003/06061 2 (Claim 12 ; Fig 10); WO20G2/26822 (Claim 23; Fig 2); WO2002/1 6429 (Claim 12 ; Fig 10); Cross-references: :22655488; AAN04080. 1;

AF4551 38

( 12 ) Trp 4 (BR22450, FLJ20041 , TRPM4, TRPM4B, transient receptor potential cation channel, subfamily M, member 4, Genbank accession no. NM_01 7636); Xu, X.Z., et a Proc

Natl. Acad. ScL U.S.A. 98 ( 9): 10692-1 0697 (2001 ), Cell 109 (3):397-407 (2002), J. Bio!. Chem. 278 (33):3081 3-30820 (2003)); US2003/1 43557 (Claim 4): WO2000/406 4 (Claim 14 ; Page 100-1 03); WO2002/1 0382 (Claim 1; Fig 9A); WO2003/042661 (Claim 12);

WO2002/30268 (Claim 27; Page 39 1); US2003/21 9806 (Claim 4); WO2001 /62794 (Claim

14 ; Fig 1A-D); Cross-references: M IM:606936; P__Q6Q 106.2; N __0 17636_1

( 3) CR PTO (CR, CR1 , CRGF, CRIPTO, TDGF1 , teratocarcinoma-derived growth factor, Genbank accession no. NP__003203 or NM_00321 2); Ciccodicola, A., et a! EMBO J. 8

(7): 1987-1 991 ( 1989), Am. J. Hum. Genet. 49 (3):555-565 ( 1991 )); US2003/22441 (Claim

1); WO2003/08304 1 (Example 1); WO2003/034984 (Claim 12); WO2002/881 70 (Claim 2; Page 52-53); WO2003/024392 (Claim 2 ; Fig 58); WO2002/1 641 3 (Claim 1; Page 94-95,

105): WO2002/22808 (Claim 2; Fig 1); US5854399 (Example 2 ; Col 17-1 8); US57926 16 (Fig

2); Cross-references: M I :187395; NP_003203.1 ; NM_0032 12_1

( 14) CD2 1 (CR2 (Complement receptor 2) or C3DR (C3d/Epstein Barr virus receptor) or

Hs.73792 Genbank accession no. 26004 ); Fujisaku et a/ ( 1989) J. Biol. Chem. 264 (4):21 18-21 25); Weis J .J., et ai J. Exp. Med. 167, 1047-1 066, 1988; Moore M., et al Proc.

Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 84, 9 194-91 98, 1987; Bare! „ et ai Mol. Immunol. 35, 1025-1 031 , 1998; Weis J .J., et ai Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 83, 5639-5643, 1986; Sinha S.K., et ai

( 1993) J. immunoi 150, 531 1-5320; WO2004/045520 (Example 4); US2004/005538

(Example 1); WO2003/062401 (Claim 9); WO2004/045520 (Example 4); WO91/02536 (Fig

9 1-9.9); WO2004/020595 (Claim 1); Accession: P20023; Q 13866; Q 1421 2; EMBL; M26004; AAA35786. 1.

( 15) CD79b (CD79B, C D79 , Gb (immunoglobu!in-associated beta), B29, Genbank accession no. N 000626 or 11038674); Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. (2003) 100 (7):4 126-

4 13 1, Biood (2002) 100 (9):3068-3076, Muller et a/ ( 1992) Eur. J. Immunol. 22 (6): 1621 - 1625); WO2G04/016225 (claim 2, Fig 140); WO2003/087768, US2004/101874 (claim 1, page 102); WO2003/062401 (ciaim 9); WO2002/78524 (Example 2); US2002/1 50573 (claim

5, page 15); US5644033; WO2003/048202 (claim 1 pages 306 and 309); W O 99/58658,

US6534482 (claim 13, Fig 17A/B); WO2000/55351 (claim 11, pages 1145-1 146); Cross- references: :147245; NP_000617.1; NM_000626_1

(16) FcRH2 (IFGP4, TA4, SPAP1A (SH2 domain containing phosphatase anchor protein 1a), SPAP1B, SPAP1C, Genbank accession no. NM_030764, AY358130); Genome Res. 13 (10):2265-2270 (2003), Immunogenetics 54 (2):87-95 (2002), Blood 99 (8):2662-2669

(2002), Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 98 (17);9772-9777 (2001 ), Xu, M.J., ef a/ (2001) Biochem. Biophys. Res. Commun. 280 (3):768-775; WO2004/0 16225 (Ciaim 2);

WO2003/077836; WO2001/38490 (Claim 5 ; Fig 18D-1-18D-2); WO2003/097803 (Ciaim 12);

WO2003/089624 (Claim 25); Cross-references: MIM:606509; NP__1 10391 .2; NM__030764_1

(17) HER2 (ErbB2, Genbank accession no. 1730); Coussens L., ef a! Science (1985)

230(4730):1 132-1 139); Yamamoto T., t a Nature 319, 230-234, 1986; Semba K., et a! Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 82, 6497-6501, 1985; Swiercz J.M., et al J. Ceil Biol. 165, 86S- 880, 2004; Kuhns J.J., eta! J. Biol. Chem. 274, 36422-36427, 1999; Cho H.-S., etai Nature 421, 756-760, 2003; Ehsani A., ef a/ (1993) Genomics 15, 426-429; WO2004/048938

(Example 2); WO2004/027049 (Fig 11); WO2004/009622; WO2003/081210;

WO2003/089904 (Claim 9); WO2003/0 16475 (Ciaim 1); US2003/1 18592; WO2003/008537

(Claim 1); WO2003/055439 (Ciaim 29; Fig 1A-B); WO2003/025228 (Ciaim 37; Fig 5C); WO2002/22636 (Example 13; Page 95-107); WO2002/12341 (Claim 68; Fig 7); WO2002/13847 (Page 71-74); WO2002/14503 (Page 114-1 17); VVO2001/53463 (Claim 2;

Page 41-46); W02GG 1/41 787 (Page 15); WO2000/44899 (Claim 52; Fig 7); VVO2000/20579

(Claim 3; Fig 2); US5869445 (Claim 3; Co 31-38); WO9630514 (Ciaim 2; Page 56-61 ); EP1439393 (Claim 7); WO2004/043361 (Claim 7); WO2004/022709; WO2001/00244

(Example 3; Fig 4); Accession: P04626; E BL; 11767; AAA35808.1 . E BL; 1761; AAA35808.1 n certain embodiments, conjugate compounds of the invention comprise anti-

HER2 antibodies. In one embodiment of the invention, an anti-HER2 antibody of an ADC of the invention comprises a humanized anti-HER2 antibody, e.g., huMAb4D5-1, huMAb4D5-2, huMAb4D5-3, huMAb4D5-4, huMAb4D5-5, huMAb4D5-6, huMAb4D5-7 and huMAb4D5-8, as described in Table 3 of US 5821337. Those antibodies contain human framework regions with the complementarity-determining regions of a murine antibody (4D5) that binds to HER2. The humanized antibody huMAb4D5-8 is also referred to as trastuzumab, commercially available under the tradename HERCEPTIN. In another embodiment of the invention, an anti-HER2 antibody of an ADC of the invention comprises a humanized anti-

HER2 antibody, e.g., humanized 2C4, as described in US7862817. A n exemplary humanized 2C4 antibody is pertuzumab, commercially available under the tradename PERJETA.

(18) NCA (CEACAM6, Genbank accession no. M18728); Barnett T., etal Genomics 3 , 59- 66, 1988; Tawaragi Y., etal Biochem. Biophys. Res. Commun. 150, 89-96, 1988; Strausberg R.L., et a! Proc. Natl. Aca S . U.S.A. 99:16899-16903, 2002; WO2004/063709; EP1439393 (Claim 7); WO2004/044178 (Example 4); WO2004/031238; WO2003/042661 (Claim 12); WO2002/78524 (Example 2); WO2002/86443 (Claim 27; Page 427); WO2002/60317 (Claim 2); Accession: P40199; Q14920; E BL; M29541; AAA59915.1 . E BL; 18728

(19) DP (DPEP1, Genbank accession no. BC017023); Proc. Natl. Acad. Scl U.S.A. 99

(26): 16899-1 6903 (2002)); WO2003/016475 (Claim 1); WO2002/64798 (Claim 33; Page 85- 87); JP05003790 (Fig 6-8); W099/46284 (Fig 9); Cross-references: i :179780: AAH 17023.1; BC017Q23_1

(20) IL2GRa (iL20Ra, ZCYTOR7, Genbank accession no. AF184971); Clark H.F., et al

Genome Res. 13, 2265-2270, 2003; ungali A.J., et al Nature 425, 805-81 1, 2003; Blumberg H., et a! Cell 104, 9-19, 2001: Dumoutier L , e a! J. Immunol. 167, 3545-3549, 2001; Parrish-Novak etal J. Biol. Chem. 277, 47517-47523, 2002; Pletnev S., ef a/ (2003) Biochemistry 42:12617-12624; Sheikh F., etal (2004) J. Immunol. 172, 2006-2010;

EP1 394274 (Example 11); US2004/005320 (Example 5); WO2003/029262 (Page 74-75); WO2003/002717 (Claim 2; Page 63); WO2002/22153 (Page 45-47); US2002/042366 (Page

20-21); WO2001/46261 (Page 57-59); WO2001/46232 (Page 63-65); W098/37193 (Claim 1; Page 55-59): Accession: Q9UHF4: Q6UWA9; Q96SH8; EMBL; AF184971; AAF01320.1 .

(21) Brevican (BCAN, BEHAB, Genbank accession no. AF229053); Gary S.C., et a Gene 256, 139-147, 2000; Clark H.F., ef al Genome Res. 13, 2265-2270, 2003; Strausberg R.L., e al Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 99, 16899-16903, 2002; US2003/1 86372 (Claim 11);

US2003/186373 (Claim 11); US2003/1 19131 (Claim 1; Fig 52); US2003/1 19122 (Claim 1;

Fig 52); US2003/1 19126 (Claim 1); US2003/1 19121 (Claim 1; Fig 52); US2003/1 19129

(Claim 1); US20Q3/1 19130 (Claim 1); US2003/1 19128 (Claim 1; Fig 52); US2003/1 19125

(Claim 1); WO2003/01 6475 (Claim 1); WO2002/02634 (Claim 1) (22) EphB2R (DRT, ERK, Hek5, EPHT3, TyroS, Genbank accession no NM_004442); Chan.J. and Wait, V.M., Oncogene 6 (6), 1057-1061 (1991 ) Oncogene 10 (5):897-905 (1995), Annu. Rev. Neurosci. 2 1:309-345 (1998), Int. Rev. Cyiol. 196:177-244 (2000));

WO2003042661 (Claim 12); WO200053216 (Claim 1; Page 4 1); WO2004065576 (Claim 1);

WO2004020583 (Claim 9); WO2003004529 (Page 128-132); WO200053216 (Claim 1; Page 42); Cross-references: I :600997; NP_004433.2; NM_004442_1

(23) ASLG659 (B7h, Genbank accession no. AX092328); US2004/0101899 (Claim 2);

WO2003104399 (C!aim 11); WO2004000221 (Fig 3); US2003/165504 (Claim 1); US2003/124140 (Example 2); US2003/065143 (Fig 60); WO2002/102235 (Claim 13; Page

299): US2003/091580 (Example 2); WO2002/10187 (Claim 6; Fig 10); WO2001/94641 (Claim 12: Fig 7b); WO2002/02624 (Claim 13; Fig 1A-1 B); US2002/034749 (Claim 54; Page 45-46): WO2002/06317 (Example 2; Page 320-321 Claim 34; Page 321-322);

WO2002/71928 (Page 468-469); WO2002/02587 (Example 1; Fig 1); WO2001/40269

(Example 3; Pages 190-192); WO2000/36107 (Example 2 Page 205-207); WO2004/053079

(Claim 12); WO2003/004989 (Claim 1); WO2002/71928 (Page 233-234, 452-453); WO 01/16318

(24) PSCA (Prostate stem cell antigen precursor, Genbank accession no. AJ297436); Reiter R.E., et ai Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 95, 1735-1740, 1998; Gu Z., et a! Oncogene 19, 1288-1296, 2000; Biochem. Biophys. Res. Commun. (2000) 275(3):783-788; WO2004/022709; EP1394274 (Example 11); US2004/018553 (Claim 17); WO2003/008537

(Claim 1); WO2002/81646 (Claim 1; Page 164); WO2003/003906 (Claim 10; Page 288);

WO2001/40309 (Example 1; Fig 17); US2001/055751 (Example 1; Fig 1b); VVO2000/32752 (Claim 18; Fig 1); WO98/51805 (Claim 17; Page 97); W098/51824 (Claim 10; Page 94); WO98/40403 (Claim 2 ; Fig 1B); Accession: 043653; EMBL; AF043498; AAC39607.1

(25) GEDA (Genbank accession No. AY260763); AAP14954 lipoma H G C fusion-partner¬ like protein /pid=AAP 14954.1 - Homo sapiens (human); WO2003/054152 (Claim 20);

WO2003/000842 (Claim 1); WO2003/02301 3 (Example 3, Claim 20); US2003/1 94704 (Claim 45); Cross-references: Gi:301 02449; AAP14954.1; AY26Q763J

(26) BAFF-R (B cell -activating factor receptor, BLyS receptor 3, BR3, Genbank accession No. AF1 16456); BAFF receptor /pid=NP_443 177.1 - Homo sapiens: Thompson, J.S., et a!

Science 293 (5537), 2 08-21 11 (2001 ); WO2004/058309; WO2004/01 161 1; WO2003/045422 (Example; Page 32-33); WO2003/0 14294 (Claim 35; Fig 6B); WO2003/035846 (Claim 70; Page 615-616); WO2002/94852 (Co 136-137); WO2002/38766

(Claim 3; Page 133); WO2002/24909 (Example 3; Fig 3); Cross-references: .606269: NP_ 443 177.1; NM_052945_1; AF1 32600

(27) CD22 (B-ceii receptor CD22-B isoform, BL CA , Lyb~8, Lyb8, S!GLEC-2, FLJ22814, Genbank accession No. AK026467); Wilson et a/ (1991) J. Exp. Med. 173:137-146; ΝΡ WO2003/072036 (Claim 1; Fig 1); Cross-references: MiM:107266; ....00 1762.1; NM_001771_1.

(28) CD79a (CD79A, CD79a, immunoglobulin-associated alpha, a B cell-specific protein that covaiently interacts with ig beta (CD79B) and forms a complex on the surface with !g M molecules, transduces a signai involved in B-ce differentiation), pi: 4.84, MW: 25028 T : 2

[P] Gene Chromosome: 19q13.2, Genbank accession No. NP__G0 1774.10); WO2003/088808, US2003/0228319; WO2003/062401 (claim 9); US2002/150573 (claim 4, pages 13-14); W099/58658 (claim 13, Fig 16); WO92/07574 (Fig 1); US5644033; Ha et al (1992) J. Immunol. 148(5):1526-1531; Miiller et al (1992) Eur. J. Immunol.. 22:1621-1625; Hashimoto et al (1994) Immunogenetics 40(4):287-295; Preud'homme e a/ (1992) Clin. Exp. Immunol. 90(1 ):141 -146; Yu e a/ (1992) J. Immunol. 148(2) 633-637; Sakaguchi et al (1988) EMBO J 7(1 1):3457-3464

(29) CXCR5 (Burkitt's lymphoma receptor 1, a G protein-coupled receptor that is activated by the CXCL13 chemokine, functions in lymphocyte migration and humoral defense, plays a role in HIV-2 infection and perhaps development of AIDS, lymphoma, myeloma, and leukemia); 372 aa, pi: 8.54 MW: 41959 TM: 7 [P] Gene Chromosome: 1q23.3, Genbank accession No. NP.. 001707.1); WO2004/040000; WO2004/0 15426; US2003/1 05292 (Example 2); US6555339 (Example 2); WO2002/61087 (Fig 1); WO2001/57188 (Claim 20, page 269); WO2001/72830 (pages 12-13); WO2000/22129 (Example 1, pages 152-153, Example 2, pages 254-256); W099/28468 (claim 1, page 38); US5440021 (Example 2, col 49-52); W094/28931 (pages 56-58); W092/17497 (claim 7 , Fig 5): Dobner et al (1992) Eur. J. Immunol. 22:2795-2799; Bareila ef al (1995) Biochem. J. 309:773-779

(30) HLA-DOB (Beta subunit of HC class II molecule (la antigen) that binds peptides and presents them to CD4+ T lymphocytes); 273 aa, pi: 6.56, MW: 30820.TM: 1 [P] Gene

Chromosome: 6p21. 3, Genbank accession No. NP_0021 11.1); Tonnelie ef al (1985) EMBO

J. 4(1 1):2839-2847; Jonsson ef a/ ( 1989) Immunogenetics 29(6):41 1-41 3; Beck ef ai ( 1992) J. Mol. Biol. 228:433-441; Strausberg ef a/ (2002) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci USA 99:16899- 16903; Servenius e a/ (1987) J. Biol. Chem. 262:8759-8766; Beck et a (1996) J. Mo Biol.

255:1-13; Naruse ef a/ (2002) Tissue Antigens 59:512-519; W099/58658 (claim 13, F g 15); US6153408 (Col 35-38); US5976551 (col 168-170); US601 1146 (col 145-146); Kasahara ef at (1989) !mmunogenetlcs 30(1 ):66-68; Larhammar et at (1985) J. Biol. Chem.

260(26): 141 11-141 19

(31) P2X5 (Purinergic receptor P2X iigand-gated ion channel 5, an ion channel gated by extracellular ATP, may be involved in synaptic transmission and neurogenesis, deficiency may contribute to the pathophysiology of idiopathic detrusor instability); 422 aa), pi: 7.63, MW: 47206 T : 1 [P] Gene Chromosome: 17p13.3, Genbank accession No.

NP_.002552.2); Le ef a/ (1997) FEBS Left. 18(1 -2): 195-1 99; VVO2004/047749; WO2003/072035 (claim 10); Touchman et a (2000) Genome Res. 10:165-173;

WO2002/22660 (claim 20); WO2003/093444 (claim 1); WO2003/087768 (claim 1); WO2003/029277 (page 82)

(32) CD72 (B-ce!l differentiation antigen CD72, Lyb-2); 359 aa, pi: 8.66, MW: 40225, TM: 1 [P] Gene Chromosome: 9p13.3, Genbank accession No. NP_00 1773.1); WO2004042346 (claim 65); WO2003/026493 (pages 51-52, 57-58); WO2000/75655 (pages 105-106); Von Hoegen ef a/ (1990) J. Immunol. 144(12):4870-4877; Strausberg et a/ (2002) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci USA 99:16899-16903.

(33) LY64 (Lymphocyte antigen 64 (RP105), type membrane protein of the leucine rich repeat (LRR) family, regulates B-ceil activation and apoptosis, loss of function is associated with increased disease activity in patients with systemic lupus erythematosis); 661 aa, pi: 6.20, MW: 74147 TM: 1 [P] Ge e Chromosome: 5q12, Genbank accession No.

NP_005573.1); US2002/1 93567; WO97/07198 (claim 11, pages 39-42); Miura ef a/ (1996) Genomics 38(3):299-304; Miura ef a/ (1998) Blood 92:2815-2822; WO2003/083047; W097/44452 (claim 8, pages 57-61); WO2000/12130 (pages 24-26)

(34) FcRH1 (Fc receptor-like protein 1, a putative receptor for the immunoglobulin Fc domain that contains C2 type Ig-like and TAM domains, may have a role in B-iymphocyte differentiation); 429 aa, pi: 5.28, MW: 46925 TM: 1 [P] Gene Chromosome: 1q21-1q22,

Genbank accession No. NP_443170.1 ); WO2003/077836; WG2001/38490 (claim 6, Fig 18E-1-18-E-2); Davis ef a/ (2001) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci USA 98(17):9772-9777;

WO2003/089624 (claim 8); EP1 347046 (claim 1); WO2003/089624 (claim 7) (35) IRTA2 (immunoglobulin superfamiiy receptor translocation associated 2, a putative immunoreceptorwith possible roles in B cell development and lymphomagenesis; deregulation of the gene by translocation occurs in some B ceil malignancies); 977 aa, pi: 8 88, MW: 106468, TM: 1 [P] Gene Chromosome: 1q21, Genbank accession No Human:AF343662, AF343683, AF343664, AF343665, AF369794, AF397453, AK09G423, AK090475, AL834187, AY358085; Mouse:AK089756, AY15809Q, AY506558; NP_1 12571.1; WO2003/024392 (claim 2, Fig 97); Nakayama et a! (2000) Biochem. Biophys. Res.

Common. 277(1):124-127; WO2003/077836; WO2001/38490 (claim 3 , Fig 18B-1-18B-2)

(36) TENB2 (TMEFF2, tomoregu!in, TPEF, HPP1, TR, putative transmembrane proteoglycan, related to the EGF/hereguiin family of growth factors and follistatin); 374 aa, NCBI Accession: AAD55776, AAF91397, AAG49451, NCB RefSeq: NP_057276; NCB Gene: 23671; OM M: 605734; SwissProt Q9UIK5; Genbank accession No AF1 79274; AY358907, CAF85723, CQ782436; WO2004/074320; JP20041 13151 ; WO2003/042661; WO2003/009814; EP1295944 (pages 69-70); WO2002/30268 (page 329); WO2001/9Q304; US2004/249130; US2004/022727; WO2004/063355; US2004/1 97325; US2003/232350; US2004/005563; US2003/124579; Horie e / (200G) Genomics 67:146-152; Uchida et al (1999) Biochem. Biophys. Res. Comrnun. 266:593-602; Liang et a/ (2000) Cancer Res. 60:4907-12; Glynne-Jones et al (2001) !nt J Cancer. Oct 15; 94(2):178-84.

(37) CD33 (CD33 molecule, SIGLEC-3, SIGLEC3, p67; CD33 antigen (gp67); gp67; myeloid cell surface antigen CD33; sialic acid binding ig-like lectin 3; sialic acid-binding ig-!ike lectin); Nucleotide : Genbank accession no. 23 197; Genbank version no. NM__23197.1 Gi:180097;Genbank record update date: Jun 23, 2010 08:47 AM; Polypeptide: Genbank accession no. AAA51948; Genbank version no. AAA51948.1 GI:1880S8; Genbank record update date: Jun 23, 2010 08:47 AM; Simmons D., et a J. Immunol. 141 (8), 2797-2800

( 1Q88) Antibodies : H195 (Lintuzumab)- Raza A., et al Leuk Lymphoma. 2009 Aug;50(8): 1336-44; US6,759,045 (Seattle Genetics/lmmunomedics); mAb OKT9: Sutherland, D.R. et al. Proc Nail Acad Sci USA 78(7): 4515-4519 1981, Schneider,C, et al J Biol Chem 257, 8516-8522 (1982); mAb E6: Hoogenboom.H.R., et al J Immunol 144, 321 1- 3217 (1990); US6.590.088 (Human Genome Sciences) -for example, SEQ D NOs: 1 and 2 and ATCC accession no. 97521; US7,557,189 (Immunogen) -for example, an antibody or fragment thereof comprising a heavy chain variable region which comprises three CDRs having the amino acid sequences of SEQ !D NOs:1-3 and a light chain variable region comprising three CDRs having the amino acid sequences of SEQ D NOs:4-6. (38) LGR5/GPR49; Nucleotide: Genbank accession no NMJ3G3667; Genbank version no. NM_003667.2 Gi:24475886; Genbank record update date: Jul 22, 20 12 03:38 P ; Polypeptide: Genbank accession no ..003658; Genbank version no NP...003658.1 Gl:4504379; Genbank record update date: Jul 22, 20 12 03:38 PM.

The parent antibody may also be a fusion protein comprising an albumin-binding peptide (ABP) sequence (Dennis et ai. (2002) "Albumin Binding As A General Strategy For improving The Pharmacokinetics Of Proteins" J Biol Chem. 277:35035-35043; WO

0 1/45746) Antibodies of the invention include fusion proteins with ABP sequences taught by: (i) Dennis et a! (2002) J Biol Chem 277:35035-35043 at Tables II and IV, page 35038;

(ii) US 2004/000 1827 at [0076]; and (iii) WO 0 1/45746 at pages 12-1 3 , and ail of which are incorporated herein by reference. in one embodiment, the antibody has been raised to target specific the tumour related antigen ν ·

The cell binding agent may be labelled, for example to aid detection or purification of the agent either prior to incorporation as a conjugate, or as part of the conjugate. The label may be a biotin label. In another embodiment, the cell binding agent may be labelled with a radioisotope.

Substituents The phrase "optionaily substituted" as used herein, pertains to a parent group which may be unsubstituted or which may be substituted.

Unless otherwise specified, the term "substituted" as used herein, pertains to a parent group which bears one or more substituents. The term "substituent" is used herein in the conventional sense and refers to a chemical moiety which is covalently attached to, or if appropriate, fused to, a parent group. A wide variety of substituents are well known, and methods for their formation and introduction into a variety of parent groups are also well known. in a preferred embodiment, the substituents described herein (which include optional substituents) are limited to those groups that are not reactive to a cell binding agent. The link to the ceil binding agent in the present case is formed from the bridge between the two PBD moieties through a linker group to the eel! binding agent. Reactive functional groups located at other parts of the PBD structure may be capable of forming additional bonds to the cell binding agent (this may be referred to as crossiinking). These additional bonds may alter transport and bioiogicai activity of the conjugate. Therefore, in some embodiment, the additional substituents are limited to those lacking reactive functionality.

in one embodiment, the substituents are selected from the group consisting of R, OR, SR,

NRR', NQ2, halo, C0 2R , COR, CON H2, CON HR, and CO RR' . in one embodiment, the substituents are selected from the group consisting of R. OR, SR,

NRR', N0 2, C0 R, COR, CONH , CON HR, and CONRR'. in one embodiment, the substituents are selected from the group consisting of R, OR, SR,

NRR', N0 2, and halo. In one embodiment, the substituents are selected from the group consisting of R, OR, SR, NRR', and N0 . Any one of the embodiment mentioned above may be applied to any one of the substituents described herein. Alternatively, the substituents may be selected from one or more of the groups listed below.

Examples of substituents are described in more detail below.

C i - 2 a ky : The term C _2 alky!" as used herein, pertains to a monovalent moiety obtained by removing a hydrogen atom from a carbon atom of a hydrocarbon compound having from 1 to 12 carbon atoms, which may be aliphatic or alicyciic, and which may be saturated or unsaturated (e.g. partially unsaturated, fully unsaturated). Thus, the term "alkyl" includes the sub-classes alkenyl, alkynyl, cycioalkyL etc., discussed below.

Examples of saturated a!ky groups include, but are not limited to, methyl (C .), ethyl (C ), propyl (C3), butyl (C ), pentyi (C5), hexyi (C ) and heptyl (C ) .

Examples of saturated linear alkyl groups include, but are not limited to, methyl (Ci ), ethyl

(C ), n-propyl (C ), n-butyl (C ), n-pentyi (a y ) (C ), n-hexyl (C ) and n-heptyl (C ).

Examples of saturated branched alky! groups include iso-propyl (C3), iso-butyl (C ), sec-butyl

(CA), tert-butyl (C ), iso-pentyl (C ), and neo-pentyl (C )

An a!kyi group ay optionally be interrupted by one or more heteroatoms selected from O, N(H) and S . Such groups may be referred to as "heteroalkyl". C2-12 Heteroalkyi: The term "C2-12 heteroalkyi" as used herein, pertains to a monovalent moiety obtained by removing a hydrogen atom from a carbon atom of a hydrocarbon compound having from 2 to 12 carbon atoms, and one or more heteroatoms selected from O, N(H) and S, preferably O and S.

Examples of heteroalkyi groups include, but are not limited to those comprising one or more ethylene glycol units of the type -(OCH CH2)-. The terminal of a heteroalkyi group may be the primary form of a heteroatom, e.g. -OH, -SH or -NH . in a preferred embodiment, the terminal is -CH 3.

C2-12 Alkenyi: The term "C2- 2 alkenyi" as used herein, pertains to an a ky! group having one or more carbon-carbon double bonds.

Examples of unsaturated alkenyi groups include, but are not limited to, ethenyi (vinyl,

CH CH ), 1-propenyl (-CH=CH-CH 3), 2-propenyi (ally!, -CH-CH=CH 2), isopropenyl

(1-methylvinyl, ~C(CH 3)=CH ), butenyl (C4), pentenyl (C ), and hexenyl (C ) .

C2-12 alkynyl: The term "C2-12 alkynyl" as used herein, pertains to an a ky group having one or more carbon-carbon triple bonds.

Examples of unsaturated alkynyl groups include, but are not limited to, ethynyl (-C≡CH) and ≡ 2-propynyl (propargyi, -CH2-C CH).

3 cycioalkyi: The term " C . cycioalkyl" as used herein, pertains to an alkyl group which is also a eyciy! group; that is, a monovalent moiety obtained by removing a hydrogen atom from an alicyciic ring atom of a cyclic hydrocarbon (carbocyclic) compound, which moiety has from 3 to 7 carbon atoms, including from 3 to 7 ring atoms.

Examples of cycioalkyl groups include, but are not limited to, those derived from: saturated monocyclic hydrocarbon compounds: cyclopropane (C ), cyclobutane (C ), cyclopentane (C5) , cyciohexane (C ), cycloheptane

(C ), methyicyclopropane (C4), dimethylcyciopropane (C5), methyicyclobutane (Cs), dimethylcyc!obutane (Cs), methylcyciopentane (Ce), dimethylcyclopentane (C ) and methyicyclohexane (C ); unsaturated monocyclic hydrocarbon compounds: cyciopropene (C3), cyc!obutene (C ), cyclopentene (Cs), cyc!ohexene (Cs), methyicyc!opropene (C4), dimethylcyciopropene (C ), methy!cyclobutene (Co), dimethylcyc!obutene (C6), methy!cydopentene (Ce), dimethy!cyc!opentene (C ) and methylcyclohexene (C7) ; and saturated polycyclic hydrocarbon compounds: norcarane (C7), norpinane (C ), norbornane (C7) .

C3-20 heterocycly!: The term "C3-20 heterocyciyl" as used herein, pertains to a monovalent moiety obtained by removing a hydrogen atom from a ring atom of a heterocyciic compound, which moiety has from 3 to 20 ring atoms, of which from 1 to 10 are ring heteroatoms. Preferably, each ring has from 3 to 7 ring atoms, of which from 1 to 4 are ring heteroatoms.

in this context, the prefixes (e.g. o, G _, etc.) denote the number of ring atoms, or C3- C3-7, 6 range of number of ring atoms, whether carbon atoms or heteroatoms. For example, the term "C .. heterocyciyi", as used herein, pertains to a heterocyciyl group having 5 or 6 ring atoms.

Examples of monocyclic heterocyciyl groups include, but are not limited to, those derived from:

'.: aziridine (C3), azetidine (C ), pyrrolidine (tetrahydropyrrole) (C ), pyrroiine (e.g.,

3-pyrroiine, 2,5-dihydropyrrole) (C5), 2H-pyrroie or 3H-pyrro!e (isopyrro!e, isoazole) (C5), piperidine (C ), dihydropyridine (C ), tetrahydropyridine (Cs), azepine (C ) ; Cv oxirane (C3), oxetane (C ), oxoiane (tetrahydrofuran) (C5) , oxo e (dihydrofuran) (C5), oxane (tetrahydropyran) (Cs), dihydropyran (Cs), pyran (Cs), oxepin (C7) ;

S : thiirane (C3), thietane (C ), thiolane (tetrahydrothiophene) (C ), thiane (tetrahydrothiopyran) (Cs), thiepane (C )

0 2: dioxolane (C ), dioxane (Cs), and dioxepane (C7) ;

O3: trioxane (C6) ; N : imidazolidine (Cs), pyrazolidine (diazolidine) (C5), imidazoline (Cs), pyrazoline

(dihydropyrazole) (C ), piperazine (Cs); : tetrahydrooxazole (Cs), dihydrooxazoie (Cs), tetrahydroisoxazole (C5), dihydroisoxazoie (C5), morpholine (Ce), tetrahydrooxazine (Cs), dihydrooxazine (Ce), oxazine

(C6);

N S : thiazoline (Cs), thiazolidine (C5), thiomorphoiine (Ce);

N2O : oxadiazine (Cs); O S : oxathiole (C ) and oxathiane (thioxane) (C ) ; and, N O S : oxathiazine (Ce).

Examples of substituted monocyclic heterocyciyl groups include those derived from saccharides, in cyclic form, for example, furanoses ( C ) , such as arabinofuranose, lyxofuranose, ribofuranose, and xylofuranse, and pyranoses (Ce), such as ai!opyranose, aitropyranose, glucopyranose, mannopyranose, gulopyranose, idopyranose, ga!actopyranose, and taiopyranose.

C -2o aryl: The ter "C5-20 aryl", as used herein, pertains to a monovalent moiety obtained by removing a hydrogen atom from an aromatic ring atom of an aromatic compound, which moiety has from 3 to 20 ring atoms. Preferably, each ring has from 5 to 7 ring atoms.

in this context, the prefixes (e.g. C 3 - , C 5- , C .6 , etc.) denote the number of ring atoms, or range of number of ring atoms, whether carbon atoms or heteroatoms. For example, the term " C .. aryi" as used herein, pertains to an aryl group having 5 or 6 ring atoms.

The ring atoms may be all carbon atoms, as in "carboaryi groups". Examples of carboaryi groups include, but are not limited to, those derived from benzene

(i.e. phenyl) ( C ) , naphthalene ( C 10), azulene ( C 10), anthracene ( C 4 ) , phenanthrene (C14), naphthacene ( C 8 ) , and pyrene (Ci 6 ) .

Examples of aryl groups which comprise fused rings, at ieast one of which is an aromatic ring, include, but are not limited to, groups derived from indane (e.g. 2,3-dihydro-1H-indene)

(Cg), indene (Cg), isoindene ( C ) , tetraiine (1,2,3,4-tetrahydronaphthalene (Cio), acenaphthene ( C 2 ) , fluorene (C13), phenalene (C13), acephenanthrene (C15), and aceanthrene ( C m).

Alternatively, the ring atoms may include one or more heteroatoms, as in "heteroaryi groups". Examples of monocyclic heteroaryi groups include, but are not limited to, those derived from:

pyrrole (azole) ( C ) , pyridine (azine) ( C 6 ) ;

O : furan (oxole) ( C 5 ) ;

S : thiophene (thiole) (Cs);

Ο ί oxazoie ( C 5 ) , isoxazoie ( C ) , isoxazine (Ce);

N 2 O oxadiazoie (furazan) ( C 5 ) ;

N 3O oxatriazole ( C ) ; N S : thiazole (Cs), isothiazo!e (C );

N2: imidazole (1,3-diazole) (Cs), pyrazole (1,2-diazo!e) (C5), pyridazine ( ,2-diazine) (Ce), pyrimidine (1,3-diazine) (C ) (e.g., cytosine, thymine, uracil), pyrazine (1,4-diazine) (Ce);

N : triazole (Cs), triazine (C ); and,

N : tetrazole (Cs).

Examples of heteroaryl which comprise fused rings, include, but are not limited to:

Cg(with 2 fused rings) derived from benzofuran (O1 ) , isobenzofuran (O1 ), indole (N , isoindole (N-j), indolizsne (N-i), indo!ine (N-i), isoindoiine (N , purine (N4) (e.g., adenine, guanine), benzimidazoie (N ), indazoie (N ), benzoxazoie (N.G-j), benzisoxazoie Ν benzodioxo!e (0 2), benzofurazan ( 20 Ί ), benzotriazole (N3), benzothiofuran (S,), benzothiazole ( S ) , benzothiadiazole (N2S);

C 10 (with 2 fused rings) derived from chromene (0 ), isochromene (O1 ) , chroman (O ), isochroman ( ), benzodioxan (0 2), quinoiine (N-i), isoquinoiine (N-i), quinolizine (N<). benzoxazine (N-jG,), benzodiazine (N2), pyridopyridine (N2), quinoxaiine (N2), quinazoline

(N2). cinnoline (N2), phthalazine (N2), naphthyridine (N2), pteridine (N );

(with 2 fused rings) derived from benzodiazepine (N2); C (with 3 fused rings) derived from carbazoie (N-j), dibenzofuran (G-j), dibenzothiophene

(Si), carboiine (N2), perimidine (N2), pyridoindole (N2) ; and,

C (with 3 fused rings) derived from acridine (N ), xanthene (O1 ) , thioxanthene (Si), oxanthrene (0 ). phenoxathiin (O S 1), phenazine (N ), phenoxazine ( N - O - ) , phenothiazine

(N1S1 ) , thianthrene (S ), phenanthridine (N ) phenanthroline (N2), phenazine (N2).

The above groups, whether alone or part of another substituent, may themselves optionally be substituted with one o r more groups selected from themselves and the additional substituents listed below.

Halo: -F, -C , -Br, and -I.

Hydroxy: -OH.

Ether: -OR, wherein R is a n ether substituent, for example, a C alky! group (also referred to as a C - alkoxy group, discussed below), a C3- heterocycly! group (also referred to as a

C3-20 heterocycly!oxy group), o r a C oary group (also referred to as a Cs^oaryloxy group), preferably a C aiky l group. Alkoxy: -OR, wherein R is an alky! group, for exampie, a G aikyi group. Examples of C aikoxy groups include, but are not limited to, -O e (methoxy), -OEt (ethoxy), -O(nPr) (n- propoxy), -O(iPr) (isopropoxy), -O(nBu) (n-butoxy), -O(sBu) (sec-butoxy), -O(iBu)

(isobutoxy), and -O(tBu) (tert-butoxy).

Acetai: -CH(OR 1)(OR 2 ), wherein R and R2 are independently acetai substituents, for

2o exampie, a C _ aikyi group, a C3-20 heterocyc!yl group, or a C - ry group, preferably a C -7 aikyi group, or in the case of a "cyclic" acetai group, R and R2, taken together with the two oxygen atoms to which they are attached, and the carbon atoms to which they are attached, form a heterocyciic ring having from 4 to 8 ring atoms. Examples of aceta! groups include, but are not limited to, -CH O e) , -CH(OEt) 2, and -CH(OMe)(OEt).

Hemiacetai: ~CH(OH)(OR ), wherein R is a hemiaceta! substituent, for example, a C 1- aikyi group, a C3-20 heterocyc!yl group, or a C5-2o aryi group, preferably a C - aikyi group. Examples of hemiacetai groups include, but are not limited to, -CH(OH)(OMe) and -

CH(OH)(OEt).

Keta!: -CR(GR')(GR 2), where R and R2 are as defined for acetals, and R is a ke a substituent other than hydrogen, for exampie, a C - aikyi group, a C3..2oheterocyclyl group, or

-2o a C5 group, preferably a C -7 aikyi group. Examples ketal groups include, but are not limited to, C( e)(G e) , -C(Me)(OEt) , -C(Me)(OMe)(OEt), -C(Et)(OMe) 2, -C(Et)(GEt) , and

-C(Et)(OMe)(OEt).

Hemiketai: -CR(QH)(OR 1), where R is as defined for hemiacetais, and R is a hemiketai substituent other than hydrogen, for exampie, a C - aikyi group, a C . heterocyclyl group, or a Cs-2o ry group, preferably a C - aikyi group. Examples of hemiacetai groups include, but are not limited to, -C(Me)(OH)(OMe), -C(Et)(OH)(OMe), -C(Me)(OH)(OEt), and

-C(Et)(OH)(OEt).

Oxo (keto, -one): =0.

Thione (thioketone): =S.

i mino (imine): =NR, wherein R is an imino substituent, for example, hydrogen, C - aikyi group, a C 3..20 heterocyclyl group, or a C .2 ryi group, preferably hydrogen or a C1.7 aikyi group. Examples of ester groups include, but are not limited to, =NH, =NMe, NEt and =NPh.

Formy (carbaidehyde, carboxaldehyde): -C(=0)H.

Acy! (keto): ~C(=G)R, wherein R is an acyi substituent, for example, a C a!ky! group (also referred to as C - alkylacyl or C - aikanoyl), a C3-20 heterocyc!yl group (also referred to as

C3-20 heterocyciylacyi), or a C -zo aryi group (also referred to as C -2o arylacyl), preferably a

C - a ky group. Examples of acy groups include, but are not iimited to, -C(=0)CH 3 (acetyl),

-C(=0)CH 2CH3 (propionyl), -C(=0)C(CH 3)3 (t-butyryl), and -C(=0)Ph (benzoyl, phenone).

Carboxy (carboxy!ic acid): -C(=0)OH.

Thiocarboxy (thiocarboxylic acid): -C(=S)SH.

Thiolocarboxy (thioiocarboxylic acid): -C(=0)SH.

Thionocarboxy (thionocarboxylic acid): -C(=S)OH. lmidic acid: -C(=NH)OH.

Hydroxamic acid: -C(=NOH)OH.

Ester (carboxylate, carboxylic acid ester, oxycarbonyi): -C(=0)OR, wherein R is an ester substituent for example, a C -7 a ky group, a C 3 heterocyciyi group, or a Cs o group, preferably a C - alkyl group. Examples of ester groups include, but are not limited to,

-C(=0)OCH3, -C(=0)OCH 2CH3, -C(=0)OC(CH 3 )3, and -C(=0)OPh.

Acyloxy (reverse ester): -OC (=0)R, wherein R is an acyloxy substituent, for example, a C - aikyi group, a C3.20 heterocyciyi group, or a Cs-2o aryi group, preferably a C - alkyl group. Ο Ο Η Examples of acyloxy groups include, but are not iimited to, - ( ) 3 (acetoxy),

-OC(=0)CH 2C H3, -OC(=0)C(CH 3)3, -OC(=0)Ph, and -OC(=0)CH 2Ph.

Oxycarboyioxy: -OC (=0)OR, wherein R is an ester substituent, for example, a C - a!kyl group, a C3..20 heterocyciyi group, or a C .2o aryi group, preferably a C alkyl group. Examples of ester groups include, but are not limited to, -OC(=0)OCH3,

-OC(=0)OC(CH 3)3, and -OC(=0)OPh.

Amino: NR R2, wherein R and R2 are independently amino substituents, for example, hydrogen, a C aikyi group (also referred to as Cwalkylamino or di-Cwalkylamino), a C3-20 heterocyclyl group, or a C5.2o ry group, preferably H or a C1.7 aikyi group, or, in the case of a "cyclic" amino group, R and R2, taken together with the nitrogen atom to which they are attached, form a heterocyclic ring having from 4 to 8 ring atoms. Amino groups may be 2 primary (-NH2) , secondary (-NHR ), or tertiary (-NHR R ), and in cationic form, may be quaternary (- + N R R 2 R 3 ) . Examples of amino groups include, but are not limited to, -NH ,

- N HCH3, -NHC(CH 3)2, -N{CH 3)2, -N(CH 2CH3 )2, and -NHPh. Examples of cyclic amino groups include, but are not limited to, aziridino, azetidino, pyrroiidino, piperidino, piperazino, morpholino, and thio orpholino

Amido (carbamoyl, carbamyl, aminocarbony!, carboxamide): -C(=G)NR R2, wherein R and R2 are independently amino substituents, as defined for amino groups. Examples of amido groups include, but are not limited to, - C (=0)NH 2 , ~C(=0)NHCH 3, - C (=0)N(CH 3 ) , 2 -C(=G)NHCH CH3, and - C (=0)N(CH 2 C H 3 ) as well as amido groups in which R and R , together with the nitrogen atom to which they are attached, form a heterocyclic structure as in. for example, piperidinocarbony!, morpholinocarbonyi, thiomorphoiinocarbonyi, and piperazinocarbonyi.

Thioamido (thiocarbamyl); -C(=S)N R R 2 , wherein R and R2 are independently amino substituents, as defined for amino groups. Examples of amido groups include, but are not limited to, -C(=S)NH 2, -C(=S)NHCH 3, -C(=S)N(CH 3)2, and C( 8 ) HCH CH3.

Acylamido (acylamino): -NR C(~0)R 2, wherein R is an amide substituent, for example, hydrogen, a C -7 aikyi group, a C3.20 heterocyclyl group, or a C5_20 aryl group, preferably hydrogen or a C1-7 alkyl group, and R2 is an acy substituent for example, a C -7 aikyi group, a C3-20 heterocyclyl group, or a C - oaryl group, preferably hydrogen or a C - alkyl group.

Examples of acylamide groups include, but are not limited to, -NHC(=0)CH 3 , 2 -NHC(=0)CH 2CH3, and -NHC^OJPh. R and R may together form a cyclic structure, as in, for example, succinimidyi, maleimidyl, and phthaiimidyl: succinimidyi maleimidyl phthalimidyl

Aminocarbonyioxy: -OC(=0)N R R2, wherein R and R2 are independently amino substituents, as defined for amino groups. Examples of aminocarbonyioxy groups include, but are not limited to, -OC(=G)N H2, -OC(=0)N H e, -OC(=0)NMe , and -OC(=0)N E 2.

Ureido: -N(R )CONR R wherein R2 and R are independently amino substituents, as defined for amino groups, and R is a ureido substituent, for example, hydrogen, a C - alkyl group, a C3-20 heterocyclyl group, or a .20 aryl group, preferably hydrogen or a C - aikyl group. Examples of ureido groups include, but are not limited to, ~N HCON H , -NHCON H e,

-NHCGNHEt, - N HCONMe 2, -NHCON Et2, -NMeCON H2, -NMeCONHMe, -NMeCONH Et, -

eCONMe2, and -NMeCON Et .

Guanidino: -NH-C(=NH)NH .

Tetrazolyl: a f ve membered aromatic ring ur nitrogen atoms and one carbon atom,

mino: -NR, wherein R is an imino substituent, for example, for example, hydrogen, a 7 a ky group, a C - oheterocyclyl group, or a C 5-2 aryl group, preferably H or a C alkyi group. Examples of imino groups include, but are not limited to, =N H. = e, and =NEt

Amidine (amidino): -C(=NR)NR 2. wherein each R is an amidine substituent, for example, hydrogen, a C - aiky group, a C3-20 heterocyclyl group, or a C - aryl group, preferably H or a C - alkyl group. Examples of amidine groups include, but are not limited to, ~C(=N H)N ,

-C(=NH)NMe 2, and -C(=NMe)NMe .

Nitro: -N0 2.

Nitroso: -NO. Azido: -N3.

Cyano (nitriie, carbonitrile): -CN. isocyano: -NC.

Cyanato: -OCN. isocyanato: -NCO.

Thiocyano (thiocyanato): -SCN isothiocyano (isothiocyanato): -NCS.

Suifhydryl (thiol, mercapto): -SH.

Thioether (sulfide): -SR, wherein R is a thioether substituent, for example, a C - aiky group

(also referred to as a C .. aikyiihio group), a C .. heterocydyl group, or a C - oaryl group, 3 2 2 preferably a C alkyi group. Examples of C aikyithio groups include, but are not limited to, -7 -

-SCH 3 and -SCH CH3.

Disulfide: -SS-R, wherein R is a disulfide substituent, for example, a C aikyl group, a C3..2o heterocydyl group, or a C5-2 ryl group, preferably a C - aikyl group (also referred to herein as Ci aikyl disulfide). Examples of C alkyl disulfide groups include, but are not limited to, -

-SSCH 3 and ~SSCH CH3.

Sulfine (sulfinyl, sulfoxide): wherein R is a sulfine substituent, for example, a C -S(=0)R, -7 aikyl group, a C . oheterocydyl group, or a C s- o ry group, preferably a C aikyl group. 3 2 -

Examples of sulfine groups include, but are not limited to, -S(=0)CH 3 and -S(=0 )CH2CH3.

Suifone (suifonyi): ) , wherein R is a suifone substituent, for example, a C aikyi -S(=0 2 - group, a heterocydyl group, or a - ary! group, preferably a C aikyi group, including, C3-20 2 -7 for example, a fluorinated or perfiuorinated C -7 aikyi group. Examples of suifone groups include, but are not limited to, ~S(=G)2CH3 (methanesu!fonyi, mesyi), ~S(=G)2CF3 (trif!yl),

-S(=0 )2CH2C H3 (esyl), -S(=0) 2C F (nonafiy!), -S (=0 )2C H2C F3 (tresyl), -S(=0) 2CH2CH2NH2 (tauryi), S P (phenylsulfonyi, besy!), 4-methylpheny!suifonyl (tosy!), 4-chiorophenylsuifonyi (closyi), 4-bromophenylsuifonyl (brosyl), 4-nitrophenyi (nosyl), 2-naphtha!enesu!fonate (napsyi), and 5-dimethylamino-naphtha!en-1-yisulfonate (dansyi).

Sulfinic acid (suifino): -S(=0)OH, -S0

Sulfonic acid (suifo): -S(=0) 2QH, -SG3H.

Sulfinate (sulfinic acid ester); -S(=0)OR; wherein R is a sulfinate substituent, for example, a

C - aikyi group, a C3-2oheterocyc!yl group, or a C5-20 aryl group, preferably a C - aikyi group.

Examples of sulfinate groups include, but are not limited to, -S(=0)OCH 3 (methoxysulfinyl; methyl sulfinate) and -S(=0)OCH 2CH3 (ethoxysuifinyl; ethyl sulfinate).

Sulfonate (sulfonic acid ester): -S(=Q)2OR, wherein R is a sulfonate substituent, for example, a C - aikyi group, a C3-20 heterocyclyi group, or a C5.2oaryl group, preferably a C - a ky group. Examples of sulfonate groups include, but are not limited to, S O H,

(methoxysulfonyl; methyl sulfonate) and -8(=0) 2OCH CH3 (ethoxysulfonyi; ethyl sulfonate).

Sulfinyloxy: -OS(=0)R, wherein R is a sulfinyloxy substituent, for example, a C - alkyl group, a C3-20 heterocyclyi group, or a C5 2oaryi group, preferably a C - alkyl group. Examples of sulfinyloxy groups include, but are not limited to, -OS(=0)CH 3 and -OS(=0)CH 2CH3.

Sulfonyloxy: -GS(=G) 2R, wherein R is a sulfonyloxy substituent for example, a C -7 aikyi group, a C3-2o heterocyclyi group, or a C5-2oaryi group, preferably a C -7 alkyl group.

Examples of sulfonyloxy groups include, but are not limited to, -OS(-0) C H3 (mesylate) and

-OS(=0) C 2CH3 (esy!ate).

Sulfate: -OS(=0) 2OR; wherein R is a sulfate substituent, for example, a C - alkyl group, a

C3-20 heterocyclyi group, or a C5-2oaryl group, preferably a C - aikyi group. Examples of sulfate groups include, but are not limited to, -OS(=0) OCH3 and ~SQ(=0) OCH C 3.

Sulfamyl (sulfamoy!; sulfinic acid amide; sulfinamide): -S(=0)NR 1R2, wherein R and R2 are independently amino substituerits. as defined for amino groups. Examples of sulfamyl groups include, but are not limited to, -S(=0)NH 2, -S(=0)NH(CH 3), -S(=0)N(CH 3) ,

-8(=G)NH(CH CH3), -S(=0)N(CH CH3)2, and -S(=0)NHPh. Sulfonamide (su!finamoyi; sulfonic acid amide; sulfonamide): wherein R and R2 are independently amino substituents, as defined for amino groups. Examples of sulfonamido groups include, but are not limited to, -S(=0) NH2, -S(=0)2N H (CH 3)

Suifamino: -NR S(=0) 2OH, wherein R is an amino substituent, as defined for amino groups.

Examples of suifamino groups include, but are not limited to, -NHS(=0) 2OH and

-N(CH 3)8(=G) OH.

Sulfonamino: wherein R is an amino substituent, as defined for amino groups, and R is a sulfonamino substituent, for example, a C - a yi group, a C3-2 heterocydyl group, or a C5.2oaryi group, preferably a -7 alkyi group. Examples of sulfonamino groups include, but are not limited to, -NHS(=0) 2CH3 and -N(CH 3)S(=Q) C6H .

Sulfinamino: -NR 8(=0)R, wherein R is an amino substituent, as defined for amino groups, and R is a sulfinamino substituent, for example, a C -7 alky group, a C3-2oheterocydyl group, or a C _ aryl group, preferably a C - alkyi group. Examples of sulfinamino groups include, but are not limited to, -NHS(=0)CH 3 and -N(CH 3)S(=0)C H .

Phosphino (phosphine): -PR 2, wherein R is a phosphino substituent, for example, -H, a C a kyi group, a C 3. heterocydyl group, or a C3-2o aryl group, preferably -H, a C -7 alky group, or a C -2o group. Examples of phosphino groups include, but are not limited to, -PH 2,

-P(CH 3 )2, -P(CH CH3) , -P(t-Bu) 2, and -P(Ph) 2.

Phospho: -P(=0) .

Phosphinyl (phosphine oxide): -P(=0)R 2, wherein R is a phosphinyl substituent, for example, a C . alky group, a C3.2 heterocydyl group, or a C5_2oaryl group, preferably a C -7 alkyi group or a C s-soaryi group. Examples of phosphinyl groups include, but are not limited to,

-P(=0)(CH 3) , -P(=0)(CH CH3) , -P(=0)(t-Bu) , and -P(=0)(Ph) .

Phosphonic acid (phosphono): -P(=0)(OH) 2.

Phosphonate (phosphono ester): -P(=0)(OR) 2, where R is a phosphonate substituent, for example, -H, a C1.7 alkyi group, a C3.2oheterocydyl group, or a C5..2 ryl group, preferably -H, a . a ky! group, or a Cs-zoaryl group. Examples of phosphonate groups include, but are not limited to, -P(=0)(OCH 3)2, ~P(=G)(OCH CH3)2, -P(=0)(0-t-Bu) 2, and -P(=0)(OPh) 2.

Phosphoric acid (phosphonooxy): -OP(=0)(OH) .

Phosphate (phosphonooxy ester): -OP(=0)(OR) 2, where R is a phosphate substituent, for example, -H, a C a group, a C3-2 heterocyclyl group, or a C5.2oaryl group, preferably -H, a C _ a!kyi group, or a C5-2oaryl group. Examples of phosphate groups include, but are not limited to, -OP(=G)(GCH 3) , -OP(=0)(OCH 2CH3)2, -OP(=0)(0-t-Bu) 2, and -OP(=G)(OPh) 2.

Phosphorous acid: -OP(OH) 2.

Phosphite: -OP(OR) , where R is a phosphite substituent, for example, -H, a C lky group, a C ;.. · heterocyciyi group, or a C5.2oaryl group, preferably -H, a C . aikyi group, or a C .. 2oaryi group. Examples of phosphite groups include, but are not limited to, -OP(QCH 3) ,

-OP(OCH CH3)2, -OP(0-i-Bu) 2, and -OP(OPh) 2.

Phosphoramidite: -OP(OR )-NR , where R and R2 are phosphoramidite substituents, for example, -H, a (optionally substituted) C alky! group, a C3.2oheterocyclyl group, or a C .2 ary group, preferably -H, a C - a kyi group, or a C5-2oaryl group. Examples of phosphoramidite groups include, but are not limited to, -OP(OCH CH3)-N(CH 3) ,

~OP(OCH C 3)-N(i-Pr) , and -OP(OCH CH CN)-N(i-Pr) .

2 Phosphoramidate: -OP(=0)(OR )-NR 2, where R and R are phosphoramidate substituents, for example, -H, a (optionally substituted) C 1-7 alkyi group, a C3_ heterocyclyl group, or a

- oar group, preferably -H, a C - alkyi group, or a C - 0 aryl group. Examples of phosphoramidate groups include, but are not limited to, -OP(~GXGCH 2CH3)-N(CH3)2,

-OP(-0)(OCH 2CH3)-N(i-Pr) 2, and -OP(=0)(OCH 2CH2CN)-N(i-Pr )2.

Alkylene

Ca- 2 alkylene: The term "C3 12 alkylene", as used herein, pertains to a bidentate moiety obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms, either both from the same carbon atom, or one from each of two different carbon atoms, of a hydrocarbon compound having from 3 to 12 carbon atoms (unless otherwise specified), which may be aliphatic or aiicyciic, and which may be saturated, partially unsaturated, or fully unsaturated. Thus, the term "alkylene" includes the sub-classes alkenylene, aikynyiene, cyc!oalkylene, etc., discussed below. Examples of linear saturated C 3 2 alkyiene groups include, but are not limited to, ~(CH 2) ~ where n is an integer from 3 to 12, for example, C 2CH2CH (propylene), -CH CH CH C - (butylene), -CH CH C CH CH - (pentylene) and -CH CH CH CH- 2CH CH CH - (heptylene).

Examples of branched saturated C3 2 alkyiene groups include, but are not limited to,

-CH(CH 3)CH2- -CH(CH 3)CH 2CH2-, -CH(CH )CH CH CH , CH CH(CH 3)CH

C CH(CH 3)CH CH - , -CH(CH CH3)-, C (CH CH3)CH , and -CH CH(C CH )C -

Examples of linear partially unsaturated C3. 2 alkyiene groups (G3. alkenylene, and alkynyiene groups) include, but are not limited to, -C CH-CH 2- , -CH 2-CH=CH 2-,

~C CH-CH ~C ~, ~CH—CH~GH ~CH2-C - , -CH— CH-CH—GH~, ~C H C H CH~C 2~, -

CH=CH-CH=CH-CH -CH 2-, -CH=CH-CH -CH=CH-, ~CH=CH-CH 2~CH 2~CH=CH~, and -CH 2- C≡C-CH -.

Examples of branched partially unsaturated C3- 2 alkyiene groups (C3- 2 alkenylene and alkynyiene groups) include, but are not limited to, -C(CH 3)=CH- -C(CH 3)=CH-CH 2-, ≡ -CH=CH-CH(CH 3)- and -C C-CH(CH 3)-.

Examples of aiicyclic saturated C3- alkyiene groups ( C3-12 cycioaikyienes) include, but are not limited to, cyc!opentylene (e.g. cyclopent-1,3-ylene), and cyciohexyiene (e.g. cyclohex~1,4~ylene).

Examples of aiicyclic partially unsaturated C3- 2 alkyiene groups ( C 3- cycioaikyienes) include, but are not limited to, cyclopentenyiene (e.g. 4-cyc!openten-1,3-ylene), cyclohexenylene (e.g. 2-cyciohexen-1,4-ylene; 3-cyclohexen-1,2-yiene; 2,5-cyciohexadien- 1,4-yiene).

Includes Other Forms Unless otherwise specified, included in the above are the well known sonic, salt, solvate, and protected forms of these substituents. For example, a reference to carboxylic acid (-COOH) also includes the anionic (carboxylate) form (-COG ), a salt or solvate thereof, as well as conventional protected forms. Similarly, a reference to an amino group includes the protonated form (-N +HR R2), a salt or solvate of the amino group, for example, a hydrochloride salt, as well as conventional protected forms of an amino group. Similarly, a reference o a hydroxyi group also includes the anionic form (-0 ), a salt or solvate thereof, as well as conventional protected forms.

Salts It may be convenient or desirable to prepare, purify, and/or handle a corresponding sail of the active compound, for example, a pharmaceutically-acceptable sait. Examples of pharmaceutically acceptable salts are discussed in Berge, eta!., J. P ar . Sci., 6 , 1-19 (1977).

For example, if the compound is anionic, or has a functional group which may be anionic

(e.g. -GOGH may be -COO ), then a salt may be formed with a suitable cation. Examples of suitable inorganic cations include, but are not limited to, alkali metal ions such as Na+ and ', alkaline earth cations such as Ca + and g2 and other cations such as ΑΓ3. Examples of suitable organic cations include, but are not limited to, ammonium ion (i.e. 4 ) and ÷ ΝΗ ' + substituted ammonium ions (e.g. NH3R , 2 ¾ , H ;. , NR ). Examples of some suitable substituted ammonium ions are those derived from: ethylamine, diethy!amine, dicyclohexylamine, triethyiamine. butylamine, ethylenediamine, ethanolamine, diethanolamine, piperazine, benzylamine, phenylbenzylamine, choline, meglumine, and tromethamine, as well as amino acids, such as lysine and arginine. An example of a + common quaternary ammonium ion is N(CH 3) . if the compound is cationic, or has a functional group which may be cationic (e.g. -NH may + be ~NH3 ), then a salt may be formed with a suitable anion. Examples of suitable inorganic anions include, but are not limited to, those derived from the following inorganic acids: hydrochloric, hydrobromic, hydroiodic, sulfuric, su!furous, nitric, nitrous, phosphoric, and phosphorous.

Examples of suitable organic anions include, but are not limited to, those derived from the following organic acids: 2-acetyoxybenzoic, acetic, ascorbic, aspartic, benzoic, camphorsu!fonic, cinnamic, citric, edetic, ethanedisulfonic, ethanesuifonic, fumaric, giucheptonic, gluconic, glutamic, giycolic, hydroxymaleic, hydroxynaphthalene carboxylic, isethionic, lactic, iactobionic, lauric, ma!eic, malic, methanesulfonic, mucic, oleic, oxalic, palmitic, pamoic, pantothenic, phenylacetic, phenylsulfonic, propionic, pyruvic, salicylic, stearic, succinic, su!faniiic, tartaric, toluenesulfonic, trifluoroacetic acid and valeric. Examples of suitable polymeric organic anions include, but are not limited to, those derived from the following polymeric acids: tannic acid, carboxymethy! cellulose. Solvates It may be convenient or desirable to prepare, purify, and/or handle a corresponding solvate of the active compound . The term "solvate" is used herein in the conventional sense to refer to a complex of solute (e.g. active compound, salt of active compound) and solvent. If the solvent is water, the solvate may be conveniently referred to as a hydrate, for example, a mono-hydrate, a di-hydrate, a tri-hydrate, etc.

The invention includes compounds where a solvent adds across the imine bond of the PBD moiety, which is illustrated below where the solvent is water or an alcohol (R OH, where R i C . a ky ):

These forms can be called the carbinolamine and carbinolamine ether forms of the PBD (as described in the section relating to R above). The balance of these equilibria depend on the conditions in which the compounds are found, as well as the nature of the moiety itself.

These particular compounds may be isolated in solid form, for example, by iyophiiisation. isomers Certain compounds of the invention may exist in one or more particular geometric, optical, enantiomeric, diasteriomeric, epimeric, atropic, stereoisomeric, tautomeric, conformational, or anomeric forms, including but not limited to, cis- and trans-forms; E- and Z-forms; c-, t-, and r- forms; endo- and exo-forms; R-, S-, and meso-forms; D- and L-forms; d- and l-forms; (+) and (-) forms; keto- enoi-, and enolate-forms; syn- and anti-forms; synclinal- and anticlinal-forms: a- and -forms: axial and equatorial forms; boat-, chair-, twist-, envelope-, and halfchair-forms; and combinations thereof, hereinafter collectively referred to as "isomers" (or "isomeric forms").

The term "chiral" refers to molecules which have the property of non-superimposability of the mirror image partner, while the term "achiral" refers to molecules which are superimposable on their mirror image partner. The term "stereoisomers" refers to compounds which have identical chemical constitution, but differ with regard to the arrangement of the atoms or groups n space.

"Diastereomer" refers to a stereoisomer with two or more centers of chira!ity and whose molecules are not mirror images of one another Diastereorners have different physical properties, e.g. melting points, boiling points, spectral properties, and reactivities. Mixtures of diastereorners may separate under high resolution analytical procedures such as electrophoresis and chromatography.

"Enantiomers" refer to two stereoisomers of a compound which are non-superimposab!e mirror images of one another.

Stereochemical definitions and conventions used herein generally follow S. P. Parker, Ed., McGraw-Hill Dictionary of Chemical Terms (1984) McGraw-Hill Book Company, New York; and E ie , E . and Wilen, S., "Stereochemistry of Organic Compounds", John Wiley & Sons, inc., New York, 1994. The compounds of the invention may contain asymmetric or chiral centers, and therefore exist in different stereoisomeric forms it is intended that all stereoisomeric forms of the compounds of the invention, including but not limited to, diastereorners, enantiomers and atropisomers, as well as mixtures thereof such as racemic mixtures, form part of the present invention. Many organic compounds exist in optically active forms, i.e., they have the ability to rotate the plane of plane-polarized light. In describing an optically active compound, the prefixes D and L, or R and S, are used to denote the absolute configuration of the molecule about its chiral center(s). The prefixes d and i or (+) and (-) are employed to designate the sign of rotation of plane-polarized light by the compound, with (-) or i meaning that the compound is levorotatory. A compound prefixed with (+) or d is dextrorotatory. For a given chemical structure, these stereoisomers are identical except that they are mirror images of one another. A specific stereoisomer may also be referred to as an enantiomer, and a mixture of such isomers is often called an enantiomeric mixture. A 50:50 mixture of enantiomers is referred to as a racemic mixture or a racemate, which may occur where there has been no stereoseiection or stereospecificity in a chemical reaction or process. The terms "racemic mixture" and "racemate" refer to an equimolar mixture of too enantiomeric species, devoid of optical activity.

Note that, except as discussed below for tautomeric forms, specifically excluded from the term "isomers", as used herein, are structural (or constitutional) isomers (i.e. isomers which differ in the connections between atoms rather than merely by the position of atoms in space). For example, a reference to a methoxy group, ~OCH 3, is not to be construed as a reference to its structural isomer, a hydroxymethy! group, -CH 2OH. Similarly, a reference to ortho-chlorophenyl s not to be construed as a reference to its structural isomer, eta chlorophenyl. However, a reference to a class of structures may well include structurally isomeric forms falling within that class (e.g. C . alkyl includes n-propyl and iso-propyl; butyl includes n-, iso~, sec-, and tert-butyl; methoxyphenyi includes ortho-, meta-, and para- methoxyphenyl).

The above exclusion does not pertain to tautomeric forms, for example, keto-, enol-, and enoiate-forms, as in, for example, the following tautomeric pairs: keto/enoi (illustrated below), imine/enamine, amide/imino alcohol, amidine/amidine, nitroso/oxime, thioketone/enethiol, N-nitroso/hyroxyazo, and nitro/aci-nitro.

keto enol enolate

The term "tautomer" or "tautomeric form" refers to structural isomers of different energies which are interconvertible via a low energy barrier. For example, proton tautomers (also known as prototropic tautomers) include interconversions via migration of a proton, such as keto-enol and imine-enamine isomerizations. Valence tautomers include interconversions by reorganization of some of the bonding electrons.

Note that specifically included in the term Isomer" are compounds with one or more isotopic substitutions. For example, H may be in any isotopic form, including H, H (D), and H (T);

C may be in any isotopic form, including C, C, and 4 C; O may be in any isotopic form, including 0 and 0 ; and the like.

Examples of isotopes that can be incorporated into compounds of the invention include isotopes of hydrogen, carbon, nitrogen, oxygen, phosphorous, fluorine, and chlorine, such as, but not limited to H (deuterium, D), H (tritium), C, C, C, 5 N, F, P, 2 P, S, Ci, and \. Various isotopicaliy labeled compounds of the present invention, for example those into which radioactive isotopes such as 3H, 3C, and 14C are incorporated. Such isotopicaliy labelled compounds may be useful in metabolic studies, reaction kinetic studies, detection or imaging techniques, such as positron emission tomography (PET) or single- photon emission computed tomography (SPECT) including drug or substrate tissue distribution assays, or in radioactive treatment of patients. Deuterium labelled or substituted therapeutic compounds of the invention may have improved D PK (drug metabolism and pharmacokinetics) properties, relating to distribution, metabolism, and excretion (ADME). Substitution with heavier isotopes such as deuterium may afford certain therapeutic advantages resulting from greater metabolic stability, for example increased in vivo half-life or reduced dosage requirements. An 18F labeled compound may be useful for PET or SPECT studies. Isotopically labeled compounds of this invention and prodrugs thereof can generally be prepared by carrying out the procedures disclosed in the schemes or in the examples and preparations described below by substituting a readily available isotopically labeled reagent for a non-isotopicaily labeled reagent. Further, substitution with heavier isotopes, particularly deuterium (i.e., 2 H or D) may afford certain therapeutic advantages resulting from greater metabolic stability, for example increased in vivo half-life or reduced dosage requirements or an improvement in therapeutic index. It is understood that deuterium in this context is regarded as a substituent. The concentration of such a heavier isotope, specificaily deuterium, may be defined by an isotopic enrichment factor. In the compounds of this invention any atom not specificaily designated as a particular isotope is meant to represent any stable isotope of that atom .

Unless otherwise specified, a reference to a particular compound includes all such isomeric forms, including (wholly or partially) racemic and other mixtures thereof. Methods for the preparation (e.g. asymmetric synthesis) and separation (e.g. fractional crystallisation and chromatographic means) of such isomeric forms are either known in the art or are readily obtained by adapting the methods taught herein, or known methods, in a known manner.

Biological Activity in vitro cell proliferation assays Generally, the cytotoxic or cytostatic activity of an antibody-drug conjugate (ADC) is measured by: exposing mammalian cells having receptor proteins, e.g. HER2, to the antibody of the ADC in a ceil culture medium; cuituring the cells for a period from about 6 hours to about 5 days; and measuring cell viability. Cell-based in vitro assays are used to measure viability (proliferation), cytotoxicity, and induction of apoptosis (caspase activation) of an ADC of the invention .

The in vitro potency of antibody-drug conjugates can be measured by a ceil proliferation assay. The Ce Titer-G o Luminescent Cell Viability Assay is a commercially available

(Promega Corp., Madison, W ), homogeneous assay method based on the recombinant expression of Coleoptera luciferase (US Paieni Nos. 5583024; 5674713 and 5700670). This cell proliferation assay determines the number of viable ceils in culture based on quantitation of the ATP present, an indicator of metaboiically active cells (Crouch et a! (1993) J. Immunol. Meth. 160:81-88; US 6602677). The CellTiter-Glo ® Assay is conducted in 96 well format making it amenable to automated high-throughput screening (HTS) (Cree eta! (1995) Anticancer Drugs 6:398-404). The homogeneous assay procedure involves adding the single reagent (CellTiter-Glo ® Reagent) directly to ceils cultured in serum-supplemented medium. Celi washing, removal of medium and multiple pipetting steps are not required. The system detects as few as 15 cells/well in a 384-weil format in 10 minutes after adding reagent and mixing. The cells may be treated continuously with ADC, or they may be treated and separated from ADC. Generally, ceils treated briefly, i.e. 3 hours, showed the same potency effects as continuously treated cells.

The homogeneous "add-mix-measure" format results in cell lysis and generation of a luminescent signal proportional to the amount of ATP present. The amount of ATP is directly proportional to the number of ce ls present in culture. The CellTiter-Glo ® Assay generates a "glow-type" luminescent signal, produced by the luciferase reaction, which has a half-life generally greater than five hours, depending on cell type and medium used. Viable cells are reflected in relative luminescence units (RLU). The substrate, Beetle Luciferin, is oxidativeiy decarboxyiated by recombinant firefly luciferase with concomitant conversion of ATP to AMP and generation of photons.

The in vitro potency of antibody-drug conjugates can also be measured by a cytotoxicity assay. Cultured adherent ceils are washed with PBS, detached with trypsin, diluted in complete medium, containing 10% FCS, centrifuged, re-suspended in fresh medium and counted with a haemocytometer. Suspension cultures are counted directly. Monodisperse celi suspensions suitable for counting may require agitation of the suspension by repeated aspiration to break up ceil clumps.

The cell suspension is diluted to the desired seeding density and dispensed (100 µ Ι per well) into black 96 well plates. Plates of adherent cell lines are incubated overnight to allow adherence. Suspension cell cultures can be used on the day of seeding.

A stock solution (1ml) of ADC (20Mg/ml) is made in the appropriate ceil culture medium. Serial 10-fold dilutions of stock ADC are made in 15ml centrifuge tubes by serially transferring 100 µ Ι to 900µ Ι of ceil culture medium. Four repiicaie wells of each ADC dilution (100 µί) are dispensed in 96-weli black plates, previously plated with cell suspension (100 µ Ι), resulting in a final volume of 200 µ Ι. Control wells receive cell culture medium ( 1ΟΟµΙ ). if the doubling time of the ceil line is greater than 30 hours, ADC incubation is for 5 days, otherwise a four day incubation is done.

At the end of the incubation period, cell viability is assessed with the Aiamar b ue assay. AlamarBlue (Invitrogen) is dispensed over the whole plate (20 µ! per well) and incubated for 4 hours. Aiamar blue fluorescence is measured at excitation 570nm, emission 585nm on the Varioskan flash plate reader. Percentage cell survival is calculated from the mean fluorescence in the ADC treated wells compared to the mean fluorescence in the control wells.

vivo efficacy The in vivo efficacy of antibody-drug conjugaies (ADC) of the invention can be measured by tumor xenograft studies in mice. For example, the in vivo efficacy of an anti-HER2 ADC of the invention can be measured by a high expressing HER2 transgenic expiant mouse model. An allograft is propagated from the Fo5 mmtv transgenic mouse which does not respond to, or responds poorly to, HERCEPT ® therapy. Subjects were treated once with ADC at certain dose levels (mg/kg) and PBD drug exposure ( g/m ); and placebo buffer control (Vehicle) and monitored over two weeks or more to measure the time to tumor doubling, log cell kill, and tumor shrinkage.

Use The conjugates of the invention may be used to provide a PBD conjugate at a target location.

The target location is preferably a proliferative ceil population. The antibody is an antibody for an antigen present in a proliferative cell population. in one embodiment the antigen is absent or present at a reduced level in a non- proliferative cell population compared to the amount of antigen present in the proliferative cell population, for example a tumour ceil population. The target location may be in vitro, in vivo or ex vivo.

The antibody-drug conjugate (ADC) compounds of the invention include those with utility for anticancer activity. In particular, the compounds include an antibody conjugated, i.e. covaientiy attached by a linker, to a PBD moiety.

At the target location the linker may not be cleaved. The antibody-drug conjugate (ADC compounds of the invention may have a cytotoxic effect without the cleavage of the linker to release a PBD drug moiety. The antibody-drug conjugates (ADC) of the invention selectiveiy deliver cytotoxic agent to tumor tissue whereby greater selectivity, i.e. a lower efficacious dose, may be achieved.

Thus, in one aspect, the present invention provides a conjugate compound as described herein for use in therapy. in a further aspect there is also provides a conjugate compound as described herein for use in the treatment of a proliferative disease. A second aspect of the present invention provides the use of a conjugate compound in the manufacture of a medicament for treating a proliferative disease.

One of ordinary skill in the art is readily able to determine whether or not a candidate conjugate treats a proliferative condition for a y particular ceil type. For example, assays which may conveniently be used to assess the activity offered by a particular compound are described in the examples below.

The term "proliferative disease" pertains to an unwanted or uncontrolled cellular proliferation of excessive or abnormal cells which is undesired, such as, neoplastic or hyperplastic growth, whether in vitro or in vivo.

Examples of proliferative conditions include, but are not limited to, benign, pre-maiignant, and malignant cellular proliferation, including but not limited to, neoplasms and tumours (e.g. histocytoma, glioma, astrocyoma, osteoma), cancers (e.g. lung cancer, small ceil lung cancer, gastrointestinal cancer, bowel cancer, colon cancer, breast carinoma, ovarian carcinoma, prostate cancer, testicular cancer, liver cancer, kidney cancer, bladder cancer, pancreas cancer, brain cancer, sarcoma, osteosarcoma, Kaposi's sarcoma, melanoma), leukemias, psoriasis, bone diseases, fibropro!iferative disorders (e.g. of connective tissues), and atherosclerosis. Cancers of particular interest include, but are not limited to, ieukemias and ovarian cancers.

Any type of cell ay be treated, including but not limited to, lung, gastrointestinal (including, e.g. bowel, colon), breast (mammary), ovarian, prostate, liver (hepatic), kidney (renal), bladder, pancreas, brain, and skin.

one embodiment, the treatment is of a pancreatic cancer.

n one embodiment, the treatment is of a tumour having ανβ integrin on the surface of the cell. it is contemplated that the antibody-drug conjugates (ADC) of the present invention may be used to treat various diseases or disorders, e.g. characterized by the overexpression of a tumor antigen. Exemplary conditions or hyperprol iterative disorders include benign or malignant tumors; leukemia, haematological, and lymphoid malignancies. Others include neuronal, glial, astrocyte!, hypothalamic, glandular, macrophagai, epithelial, stromal, biastocoelic, inflammatory, angiogenic and immunologic, including autoimmune, disorders.

Generally the disease or disorder to be treated is a hyperproiiferative disease such as cancer. Examples of cancer to be treated herein include, but are not limited to, carcinoma, lymphoma, blastoma, sarcoma, and leukemia or lymphoid malignancies. More particular examples of such cancers include squamous cell cancer (e.g. epithelial squamous ce i cancer), lung cancer including small-cell lung cancer, non-small cell lung cancer, adenocarcinoma of the lu g and squamous carcinoma of the lung, cancer of the peritoneum, hepatocellular cancer, gastric or stomach cancer including gastrointestinal cancer, pancreatic cancer, glioblastoma, cervical cancer, ovarian cancer, liver cancer, bladder cancer, hepatoma, breast cancer, colon cancer, rectal cancer, coiorectai cancer, endometrial or uterine carcinoma, salivary gland carcinoma, kidney or renal cancer, prostate cancer, vulval cancer, thyroid cancer, hepatic carcinoma, anal carcinoma, penile carcinoma, as well as head and neck cancer.

Autoimmune diseases for which the ADC compounds may be used in treatment include rheumatoiogic disorders (such as, for example, rheumatoid arthritis, Sjogren's syndrome, scleroderma, lupus such as SLE and lupus nephritis, polymyositis/dermatomyositis, cryoglobulinemia, anti-phospholipid antibody syndrome, and psoriatic arthritis), osteoarthritis, autoimmune gastrointestinal and liver disorders (such as, for example, inflammatory bowel diseases (e.g. ulcerative colitis and Crohn's disease), autoimmune gastritis and pernicious anemia, autoimmune hepatitis, primary biliary cirrhosis, primary sclerosing cholangitis, and celiac disease), vasculitis (such as, for example, ANCA-associated vasculitis, including Churg-Strauss vasculitis, Wegener's granulomatosis, and polyarteritis), autoimmune neuroiogicai disorders (such as, for example, multiple sclerosis, opsoclonus myoclonus syndrome, myasthenia gravis, neuromyelitis optica, Parkinson's disease, Alzheimer's disease, and autoimmune polyneuropathies), renal disorders (such as, for example, glomerulonephritis, Goodpasture's syndrome, and Berger's disease), autoimmune dermatologic disorders (such as, for example, psoriasis, urticaria, hives, pemphigus vulgaris, bullous pemphigoid, and cutaneous lupus erythematosus), hematologic disorders (such as, for example, thrombocytopenic purpura, thrombotic thrombocytopenic purpura, post transfusion purpura, and autoimmune hemolytic anemia), atherosclerosis, uveitis, autoimmune hearing diseases (such as, for example, inner ear disease and hearing loss), Behcet's disease, Raynaud's syndrome, organ transplant, and autoimmune endocrine disorders (such as, for example, diabetic-related autoimmune diseases such as insulin- dependent diabetes mel!itus (IDDM), Addison's disease, and autoimmune thyroid disease (e.g. Graves' disease and thyroiditis)). More preferred such diseases include, for example, rheumatoid arthritis, ulcerative colitis, ANCA-associated vasculitis, lupus, multiple sclerosis, Sjogren's syndrome, Graves' disease, IDDM, pernicious anemia, thyroiditis, and glomerulonephritis.

Methods of Treatment The conjugates of the present invention may be used in a method of therapy. Also provided is a method of treatment, comprising administering to a subject in need of treatment a therapeutically-effective amount of a conjugate compound of the invention. The term "therapeutically effective amount" is an amount sufficient to show benefit to a patient. Such benefit may be at least amelioration of at least one symptom. The actual amount administered, and rate and time-course of administration, will depend on the nature and severity of what is being treated. Prescription of treatment, e.g. decisions on dosage, is within the responsibility of general practitioners and other medical doctors.

A compound of the invention may be administered alone or in combination with other treatments, either simultaneously or sequentiaily dependent upon the condition to be treated. Examples of treatments and therapies include, but are not limited to, chemotherapy (the administration of active agents, including, e.g. drugs, such as chemolherapeutics); surgery; and radiation therapy.

A "chemotherapeutic agent" is a chemical compound useful in the treatment of cancer, regardless of mechanism of action. Classes of chemotherapeutic agents include, but are not limited to: alkylating agents, antimetabolites, spindle poison plant alkaloids, cytotoxic/antitumor antibiotics, topoisomerase inhibitors antibodies, photosensitizers, and kinase inhibitors. Chemotherapeutic agents include compounds used in "targeted therapy" and conventional chemotherapy.

Examples of chemotherapeutic agents include: erlotinib (TARCEVA®, Genentech/OSI Pharm.), docetaxe! (TAXGTERE®, Sanofi-Aventis), 5-FU (fiuorouraci!, 5-fluorouracii, CAS No. 51-21-8), gemcitabine (GEMZAR®, Lilly), PD-0325901 (CAS No. 391210-10-9, Pfizer), cispiatin (cis-diamine, dichloroplatinum(l!), CAS No. 15663-27-1), carboplatin (CAS No. 41575-94-4), pac!itaxel (TAXOL®, Bristol-Myers Squibb Oncology, Princeton, N.J.), trastuzumab (HERCEPTIN®, Genentech), temozoiomide (4-methyi-5-oxo- 2,3,4,6.8- pentazabicyc!o [4.3.0] nona-2,7,9-triene- 9-carboxamide, CAS No. 85622-93-1, TEMODAR®, TEMGDAL®, Sobering Plough), tamoxifen ((Z)-2-[4-(1,2-diphenylbut-1- enyl)phenoxy]-A/,N-dimethylethanamine, NOLVADEX®, ISTUBAL®, VALODEX®), and doxorubicin (ADRIAMYCiN®), Akti-1/2, HPPD, and rapamycin. More examples of chemotherapeutic agents include: oxalipiatin (ELOXAT!N®, Sanofi), bortezomib (VELCADE®, Millennium Pharm.), sutent (SUN T IB®, SU 1248, Pfizer), letrozoie (FEMARA®, Novartis), imatinib mesylate (GLEEVEC®, Novartis), XL-518 (Mek inhibitor, Exeiixis, WO 2007/044515), ARRY-886 (Mek inhibitor, AZD6244, Array BioPharma, Astra Zeneca), SF-1 126 (PI3K inhibitor, Semafore Pharmaceuticals), BEZ-235 (PI3K inhibitor, Novartis), XL-147 (PI3K inhibitor, Exeiixis), PTK787/ZK 222584 (Novartis), fuivestrant (FASLODEX®, AstraZeneca), !eucovorin (foiinic acid), rapamycin (sirolimus, RAPAMUNE®, Wyeth), lapatinib (TYKERB®, GSK572016, Glaxo Smith Kline), lonafarnib (SARASAR™, SCH 66336, Schering Plough), sorafenib (NEXAVAR®, BAY43-9006, Bayer

Labs), gefitinib (IRESSA®, AstraZeneca), irinotecan (CAMPTOSAR®, CPT-1 1, Pfizer), tipifarnib (ZARNESTRA™, Johnson & Johnson), ABRAXANE™ (Cremophor-free), albumin- engineered nanoparticle formulations of paclitaxel (American Pharmaceutical Partners,

Schaumberg, II), vandetanib (r!NN, ZD6474, ZACTIMA®, AstraZeneca), chioranmbucii, AG1478, AG1571 (SU 5271; Sugen), temsirolimus (TORISEL®, Wyeth), pazopanib (GlaxoSmithKline), canfosfamide (TELCYTA®, Te!ik), thiotepa and cyclosphosphamide (CYTOXAN®, NEOSAR©); aikyi sulfonates such as busu!fan, improsulfan and piposulfan; aziridines such as benzodopa, carboquone, meturedopa, and uredopa; ethylenimines and methyiamelamines including aitretamine, triethyienemelamine, triethylenephosphoramide, triethy!enethiophosphoramide and trimethylome!amine; acetogenins (especially builatacin and bul!atacinone); a campiothecin (including the synthetic analog topotecan); bryostatin; callystatin; CC-1 085 (including its adozelesin, carzelesin and bizelesin synthetic analogs); cryptophycins (particularly cryptophycin 1 and cryptophycin 8); dolastatin; duocarmycin

(including the synthetic analogs, KVV-21 89 and CB1 -TM 1); eleutherobin; pancratistatin; a sarcodictyin; spongistatin: nitrogen mustards such as chlorambucil chiornaphazine, chlorophosphamide. estramustine, ifosfamide, mech!orethamine, mechlorethamine oxide hydrochloride, melpha!an, novembichin, phenesterine, prednimustine, trofosfamide, uracil mustard; nitrosoureas such as carmustine, chiorozotocin, fotemustine, iomustine, nimustine, and ranimnustine; antibiotics such as the enediyne antibiotics (e.g. calicheamicin, calicheamicin gammal , calicheamicin omegal l (Angew Chern. Intl. Ed. Engl. ( 1994) 33: 183-1 86); dynemicin, dynemicin A ; bisphosphonates, such as clodronate; an esperamicin; as well as neocarzinostatin chromophore and related chromoprotein enediyne antibiotic chromophores), aclacinomysins, actinomycin, authramycin, azaserine, bleomycins, cactinomycin, carabicin, carminomycin, carzinophilin, chromomycinis, dactinomycin, daunorubicin, detorubicin, 6-diazo-5-oxo-L-norieucine, morphoiino-doxorubicin, cyanomorpholino-doxorubicin, 2-pyrroiino-doxorubicin and deoxydoxorubicin), epirubicin, esorubicin, idarubicin, nemorubicin, marcellomycin, mitomycins such as mitomycin C, mycophenoiic acid, nogalamycin, olivomycins, peplomycin, porfiromycin, puromycin, quelamycin, rodorubicin, streptonigrin, streptozocin, tubercidin, ubenimex, zinostatin, zorubicin; anti-metabolites such as methotrexate and 5-fiuorouracil (5-FU); folic acid analogs such as denopterin, methotrexate, pteropterin, trimetrexate; purine analogs such as fiudarabine, 8-mercaptopurine, thiamiprine, thioguanine; pyrimidine analogs such as ancitabine, azacitidine, 6~azauridine, carmofur, cytarabine, dideoxyuridine, doxif!uridine, enocitabine, floxuridine; androgens such as caiusterone, dromostanoione propionate, epitiostano!, mepitiosiane, testolactone; anti-adrenals such as aminoglutethimide, mitotane, triiostane; folic acid replenisher such as froiinic acid; acegiatone; aidophosphamide glycoside; aminolevulinic acid; eni!uracii; amsacrine; bestrabucil; bisantrene; edatraxate; defofamine; demecolcine; diaziquone; elfornithine; ei!iptinium acetate; an epothilone; etog!ucid; gallium nitrate; hydroxyurea; lentinan; !onidainine; maytansinoids such as maytansine and ansamitocins; mitoguazone; mitoxantrone; mopidanmoi; nitraerine; pentostatin; phenamet; pirarubicin; losoxantrone; podophyllinic acid; 2-ethyihydrazide; procarbazine; PSK® polysaccharide complex (J HS Natural Products, Eugene, OR); razoxane; rhizoxin; sizofiran; spirogermanium; tenuazonic acid; triaziquone; 2,2',2"- trichlorotriethyiamine; trichothecenes (especially T~2 toxin, verracurin A , roridin A and anguidine); urethan; vindesine; dacarbazine; mannomustine; mitobronitol; mitolacto!; pipobroman; gacytosine; arabinoside ("Ara-C"); cyclophosphamide; thiotepa; 6-thioguanine; mercapiopurine; methotrexate; platinum analogs such as cisplatin and carboplatin; vinblastine; etoposide (VP-16); ifosfamide; mitoxantrone; vincristine; vinorelbine (NAVELBINE®); novantrone; teniposide; edatrexate; daunomycin; aminopterin; capecitabine

(XELODA®, Roche); ibandronate; CPT-1 ; topoisomerase inhibitor RFS 2000; difluoromethy!ornithine (DMFO); retinoids such as retinoic acid; and pharmaceutically acceptable salts, acids and derivatives of any of the above.

Also included in the definition of "chemotherapeutic agent" are: (i) anti-hormonal agents that act to regulate or inhibit hormone action on tumors such as anti-estrogens and selective estrogen receptor modulators (SERMs), including, for example, tamoxifen (including NOLVADEX®; tamoxifen citrate), raloxifene, droioxifene, 4-hydroxytamoxifen, trioxifene, keoxifene, LY117018, onapristone, and FARESTON® (toremifine citrate); (is) aromatase inhibitors that inhibit the enzyme aromatase, which regulates estrogen production in the adrenal glands, such as, for example, 4(5)-imidazoles, aminoglutethimide, MEGASE® (megestrol acetate), AROMASIN® (exemestane; Pfizer), formestanie, fadrozole, RIVISOR® (vorozoie), FEMARA® (ietrozole; ovar is), and ARIMIDEX® (anastrozole; AstraZeneca); ( l) anti-androgens such as flutamide, niiutamide, bicalutamide, leuprolide, and goserelin; as well as troxacitabine (a 1,3-dioxolane nucleoside cytosine analog); (iv) protein kinase inhibitors such as MEK inhibitors (WO 2007/044515); (v) lipid kinase inhibitors; (vi) antisense oligonucleotides, particularly those which inhibit expression of genes in signaling pathways implicated in aberrant cell proliferation, for example, PKC-aipha, Raf a d H-Ras, such as oblimersen (GENASENSE®, Genta Inc.); (vii) ribozymes such as VEGF expression inhibitors (e.g., ANGIOZYME®) and HER2 expression inhibitors; (viii) vaccines such as gene therapy vaccines, for example, ALLOVECTIN®, LEUVECTIN®, and VAXID®; PROLEUKIN® rlL-2; topoisomerase 1 inhibitors such as LURTOTECAN©; ABARELIX® rmRH; (ix) anti- angiogenic agents such as bevacizumab (AVASTIN®, Genentech); and pharmaceutically acceptable salts, acids and derivatives of any of the above. Also included in the definition of "chemotherapeutic agent" are therapeutic antibodies such as alemtuzumab (Campath), bevacizumab (AVASTIN®, Genentech); cetuximab (ERB!TUX®, !mclone); panitumumab (VECTIBiX®, Amgen), rituximab (RITUXAN®, Genentech/Biogen idee), pertuzumab (OMNITARG™, 2C4, Genentech), trastuzumab (HERCEPTIN®, Genentech), tositumomab (Bexxar, Corixia), and the antibody drug conjugate, gemtuzumab ozogamicin (MYLOTARG®. Wyeth). Humanized monoclonal antibodies with therapeutic potential as chemotherapeutic agents in combination with the conjugates of the invention include: alemtuzumab, apo!izumab, aselizumab, at!izumab, bapineuzumab, bevacizumab, bivatuzumab mertansine, cantuzumab mertansine, cedelizumab, certoiizumab pegol, cidfusituzumab, cidtuzumab, daclizumab, eculizumab, efaiizumab, epratuzumab, eriizumab, felvizumab, fonto!izumab, gemtuzumab ozogamicin, inotuzumab ozogamicin, ipilimumab, labetuzumab, lintuzumab, matuzumab, mepo!izumab, motavizumab, motovizumab, natalizumab, nimotuzumab, noiovizumab, numavizumab, ocrelizumab, omalizumab, palivizumab, pascoiizumab, pecfusituzumab, pectuzumab, periuzumab, pexeiizumab, raiivizumab, ranibizumab, reslivizumab, resiizumab, resyvizumab, rovelizumab, rupiizumab, sibrotuzumab, siplizumab, sontuzumab. tacatuzumab tetraxetan, tadocizumab, talizumab, tefibazumab, toci!izumab, toralizumab, trastuzumab, tucotuzumab ceimoleukin, tucusituzumab, umavtzumab, urtoxazumab, and visiiizumab.

Pharmaceutical compositions according to the present invention and for use in accordance with the present invention, may comprise, in addition to the active ingredient, i.e. a conjugate compound, a pharmaceutically acceptable excipient, carrier, buffer, stabiliser or other materials well known to those skilled in the art. Such materials should be non-toxic and should not interfere with the efficacy of the active ingredient. The precise nature of the carrier or other material will depend on the route of administration, which may be oral, or by injection, e.g. cutaneous, subcutaneous, or intravenous.

Pharmaceutical compositions for oral administration may be in tablet, capsule, powder or liquid form. A tablet may comprise a solid carrier or an adjuvant. Liquid pharmaceutical compositions generally comprise a liquid carrier such as water, petroleum, animal or vegetable oils, mineral oil or synthetic oil. Physiological saline solution, dextrose or other saccharide solution or glycols such as ethylene glycol, propylene glycol or polyethylene glycol may be included. A capsule may comprise a solid carrier such a gelatin.

For intravenous, cutaneous or subcutaneous injection, or injection at the site of affliction, the active ingredient will be in the form of a parenteraliy acceptable aqueous solution which is pyrogen-free and has suitable pH, isotonicity and stability. Those of relevant skill in the art are well able to prepare suitable solutions using, for example, isotonic vehicles such as Sodium Chloride Injection, Ringer's Injection, Lactated Ringer's Injection. Preservatives, stabilisers, buffers, antioxidants and/or other additives may be included, as required. Formulations While i is possible for the conjugate compound to be used (e.g., administered) alone, it is often preferable to present it as a composition or formulation. in one embodiment, the composition is a pharmaceutical composition (e.g., formulation, preparation, medicament) comprising a conjugate compound, as described herein, and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier, diluent, or excipient. in one embodiment, the composition is a pharmaceutical composition comprising at least one conjugate compound, as described herein, together with one or more other pharmaceutically acceptable ingredients well known to those skilled in the art, including, but not limited to, pharmaceutically acceptable carriers, diluents, excipients, adjuvants, fillers, buffers, preservatives, antioxidants, lubricants, stabilisers, so!ubilisers, surfactants (e.g., wetting agents), masking agents, colouring agents, flavouring agents, and sweetening agents. in one embodiment, the composition further comprises other active agents, for example, other therapeutic or prophylactic agents.

Suitable carriers, diluents, excipients, etc. can be found n standard pharmaceutical texts.

See, for example, Handbook of Pharmaceutical Additives , 2nd Edition (eds. M. Ash and . Ash), 2001 (Synapse information Resources, inc., Endicott, New York, USA), Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences , 20th edition, pub. Lippincott, Williams & W kins, 2000; and Handbook of Pharmaceutical Excipients , 2nd edition, 1994.

Another aspect of the present invention pertains to methods of making a pharmaceutical composition comprising admixing at least one [ Cj-radiolabelled conjugate or conjugate-like compound, as defined herein, together with one or more other pharmaceutically acceptable ingredients well known to those skilled in the art, e.g., carriers, diluents, excipients, etc. if formulated as discrete units (e.g., tablets, etc.), each unit contains a predetermined amount (dosage) of the active compound.

The term "pharmaceutically acceptable," as used herein, pertains to compounds, ingredients, materials, compositions, dosage forms, etc., which are, within the scope of sound medical judgment suitable for use in contact with the tissues of the subject in question (e.g., human) without excessive toxicity, irritation, allergic response, or other problem or complication, commensurate with a reasonable benefit/risk ratio. Each carrier, diluent, excipient, etc. must also be "acceptable" in the sense of being compatible with the other ingredients of the formulation.

The formulations may be prepared by any methods well known in the art of pharmacy. Such methods include the step of bringing into association the active compound with a carrier which constitutes one or more accessory ingredients. In general, the formulations are prepared by uniformly and intimately bringing into association the active compound with carriers (e.g., liquid carriers, finely divided solid carrier, etc.), and then shaping the product, if necessary.

The formuiation may be prepared to provide for rapid or slow release; immediate, delayed, timed, or sustained release; or a combination thereof.

Formulations suitable for parenteral administration (e.g., by injection), include aqueous or non-aqueous, isotonic, pyrogen-free, sterile liquids (e.g., solutions, suspensions), in which the active ingredient is dissolved, suspended, or otherwise provided (e.g., n a liposome or other microparticulate). Such liquids may additional contain other pharmaceutically acceptable ingredients, such as antioxidants, buffers, preservatives, stabilisers, bacteriostais, suspending agents, thickening agents, and solutes which render the formuiation isotonic with the blood (or other relevant bodily fluid) of the intended recipient. Examples of excipients include, for example, water, alcohols, poiyols, glycerol, vegetable oils, and the like. Examples of suitable isotonic carriers for use i such formulations include Sodium Chloride Injection, Ringer's Solution, or Lactated Ringer's Injection. Typically, the concentration of the active ingredient in the liquid is from about 1 ng/m to about 1 g/ , for example from about 10 ng/mi to about 1 g/m!. The formulations may be presented in unit-dose or multi-dose sealed containers, for example, ampoules and vials, and may be stored in a freeze-dried (lyophiiised) condition requiring only the addition of the sterile liquid carrier, for example water for injections, immediately prior to use. Extemporaneous injection solutions and suspensions may be prepared from sterile powders, granules, and tablets.

Dosage it will be appreciated by one of skill in the art that appropriate dosages of the conjugate compound, and compositions comprising the conjugate compound, can vary from patient to patient. Determining the optimal dosage will generally involve the balancing of the level of therapeutic benefit against any risk or deleterious side effects. The selected dosage level will depend on a variety of factors including, but not limited to, the activity of the particular compound, the route of administration, the time of administration, the rate of excretion of the compound, the duration of the treatment, other drugs, compounds, and/or materials used in combination, the severity of the condition, and the species, sex, age, weight, condition, general health, and prior medical history of the patient. The amount of compound and route of administration will ultimately be at the discretion of the physician, veterinarian, or clinician, although generally the dosage will be selected to achieve local concentrations at the site of action which achieve the desired effect without causing substantial harmful or deleterious side-effects.

Administration can be effected in one dose, continuously or intermittently (e.g., in divided doses at appropriate intervals) throughout the course of treatment. Methods of determining the most effective means and dosage of administration are well known to those of skill in the art and will vary with the formulation used for therapy, the purpose of the therapy, the target celi(s) being treated, and the subject being treated. Single or multiple administrations can be carried out with the dose level and pattern being selected by the treating physician, veterinarian, or clinician. in general a suitable dose of the active compound is in the range of about 100 ng to about 25 g (more typically about 1 to about 10 mg) per kilogram body weight of the subject per day. Where the active compound is a salt, an ester, an amide, a prodrug, or the like, the amount administered is calculated on the basis of the parent compound and so the actual weight to be used is increased proportionately. in one embodiment, the active compound is administered to a human patient according to the foliowing dosage regime: about 00 mg, 3 times daily. in one embodiment, the active compound is administered to a human patient according to the foliowing dosage regime: about 150 mg, 2 times daily. in one embodiment, the active compound is administered to a human patient according to the following dosage regime: about 200 mg, 2 times daily.

However in one embodiment, the conjugate compound is administered to a human patient according to the following dosage regime: about 50 or about 75 mg, 3 or 4 times daily. in one embodiment, the conjugate compound is administered to a human patient according to the following dosage regime: about 00 or about 125 mg, 2 times daily.

The dosage amounts described above may apply to the conjugate (including the PBD moiety and the linker to the antibody) or to the effective amount of PBD compound provided, for example the amount of compound that is reieasable after cleavage of the linker.

For the prevention or treatment of disease, the appropriate dosage of an ADC of the invention will depend on the type of disease to be treated, as defined above, the severity and course of the disease whether the molecule is administered for preventive or therapeutic purposes previous therapy, the patient's clinical history and response to the antibody, and the discretion of the attending physician. The molecule is suitably administered to the patient at one time or over a series of treatments. Depending on the type and severity of the disease, about 1 fig/kg to 5 mg/kg (e.g. 0.1-20 mg/kg) of molecule is an initial candidate dosage for administration to the patient, whether, for example, by one or more separate administrations, or by continuous infusion. A typical daily dosage might range from about 1 µ g to 100 mg/kg or more, depending on the factors mentioned above. An exemplary dosage of ADC to be administered to a patient is in the range of about 0.1 to about 10 mg/kg of patient weight. For repeated administrations over several days or longer, depending on the condition, the treatment is sustained until a desired suppression of disease symptoms occurs. An exemplary dosing regimen comprises a course of administering an initial loading dose of about 4 mg/kg, followed by additional doses every week, two weeks, or three weeks of an ADC. Other dosage regimens may be useful. The progress of this therapy is easily monitored by conventional techniques and assays.

Treatment The term "treatment," as used herein in the context of treating a condition, pertains generally to treatment and therapy, whether of a human or an animal (e.g., in veterinary applications), in which some desired therapeutic effect is achieved, for example, the inhibition of the progress of the condition, and includes a reduction in the rate of progress, a halt in the rate of progress, regression of the condition, amelioration of the condition, and cure of the condition. Treatment as a prophylactic measure (i.e., prophylaxis, prevention) is also included. The term "therapeuticaiiy-effective amount," as used herein, pertains to that amount of an active compound, or a material, composition or dosage from comprising an active compound, which is effective for producing some desired therapeutic effect, commensurate with a reasonable benefit/risk ratio, when administered in accordance with a desired treatment regimen.

Similarly, the term "prophylactically-effective amount," as used herein, pertains to that amount of an active compound, or a material, composition or dosage from comprising an active compound, which is effective for producing some desired prophylactic effect, commensurate with a reasonable benefit/risk ratio, when administered in accordance with a desired treatment regimen.

Preparation of Antibody drug conjugates Antibody drug conjugates may be prepared by several routes, employing organic chemistry reactions, conditions, and reagents known to those skilled in the art, including: ( 1 ) reaction of a nucleophilic group of an antibody with a bivalent linker reagent, to form antibody-linker intermediate Ab-L, via a covaient bond, followed by reaction with an activated drug moiety reagent ; and (2) reaction of a drug moiety reagent with a linker reagent, to form drug-linker reagent D-L, via a covaient bond, followed by reaction with the nucleophilic of an antibody. Conjugation methods (1) and (2) may be employed with a variety of antibodies, and linkers to prepare the antibody-drug conjugates of the invention.

Nucieophi!ic groups on antibodies include, but are not limited to side chain thiol groups, e.g. cysteine. Thiol groups are nucleophilic and capable of reacting to form covaient bonds with eiectrophilic groups on linker moieties such as those of the present invention. Certain antibodies have reducible interchain disulfides, i.e. cysteine bridges. Antibodies may be made reactive for conjugation with linker reagents by treatment with a reducing agent such as DTT (Cleland's reagent, dithiothreitol) or TCEP (tris(2-carboxyethyl)phosphine hydrochloride; Getz et ai (1999) Ana . Biochem. Vol 273:73-80; Soitec Ventures, Beverly, MA). Each cysteine disulfide bridge will thus form, theoretically, two reactive thiol nuc!eophiles. Additional nucleophilic groups can be introduced into antibodies through the reaction of lysines with 2-iminothiolane (Traut's reagent) resulting in conversion of an amine into a thiol. The Subject/Patient The subject/patient may be an animal, mammal, a placental mammal, a marsupial (e.g., kangaroo, wombat), a monotreme (e.g., duckbilled platypus), a rodent (e.g., a guinea pig, a hamster, a rat, a mouse), murine (e.g., a mouse), a lagomorph (e.g., a rabbit), avian (e.g., a bird), canine (e.g., a dog), feline (e.g., a cat), equine (e.g., a horse), porcine (e.g., a pig), ovine (e.g., a sheep), bovine (e.g., a cow), a primate, simian (e.g., a monkey or ape), a monkey (e.g., marmoset, baboon), an ape (e.g., gorilla, chimpanzee, orangutang, gibbon), or a human.

Furthermore, the subject/patient may be any of its forms of development, for example, a foetus. In one preferred embodiment, the subject/patient is a human. in one embodiment, the patient is a population where each patient has a tumour having α β integrin on the surface of the cell.

Synthesis One possible s nthesis route to a dimer intermediate of formula IV is shown below:

XXV XVii in the above schemes, R , R and R ' each independently represent a nitrogen protecting group. R and R ' each independently represent OH or OProt°, where Prot° is a hydroxy protecting group. Protecting groups are well known in the art. R , R and ' may be, for example, BOC. Prot° may be THP. It may be the protection of the N10-C1 1 imine bonds is removed at a differnet stage in the synthesis methods to that shown above, dependent on the chemistries employed.

In general, the compounds and conjugates can be prepared by first linking two PBD monomers with a phenylene or pyridylene dimer bridge to produce intermediate V or XXL

The halogen group on the ary ring in the dimer bridge of intermediate IV may then be used to form the tether (including linker group G or L) to connect the PBD dimer to the cell binding agent. in more detail, two PBD monomers with -XH and - ΧΉ groups at the C8 position of each

PBD monomer (intermediates and II, respectively) may be reeled with -T-Ha! and -T'-Ha! groups on intermediate I or intermediate XX. Such a method of synthesis allows for the PBD monomers to be different and so the resulting PBD dimer is asymmetrical. Equally, the PBD monomers may be the same.

PBD dimer intermediate V may be used to provide the compounds and conjugates of the present invention by reacting the aryl halogen group in the bridge in a number of ways.

First, intermediate IV can be used in a Sonogishira cross-coupling reaction to provide an acetylene group on the aryl group of the dimer bridge. Sonogishira cross-coupling reactions are well known in the art for coupling a terminal alkyne with an aryl halide in the presence of a palladium catalyst, such as Pd(Ph3)4, a copper catalyst, such as Cui, and a base, such as diethyiamine.

When acetylene is to be used as the terminal acetylene, one side of the acetylene molecule is typically protected with, for example, TMS in order to prevent cross-linking of the PBD dinners. Once the Sonogishira reaction is complete, the TMS group can be cleaved to provide alkyne intermediate V.

intermediate V can be reacted with an azido compound to form a triazole derivative in an azide-alkyne Huisgen cycloaddition. Such a reaction may be catalysed by a copper catalyst. To form the compounds and conjugates of the present invention, the azide is bonded to an ethylene group and a variable number of PEG groups. The azide may be terminated with an amine group to react further. Reaction of intermediate V with an amino-azide compound will provide intermediate V .

The free amine group of intermediate V I can then be reacted with a carboxylic acid group of a linker group for connecting to a cell binding unit to form the amido group linking the PBD dimer to the linker group G or L to provide compound VII.

The linker group/reactive group, G , of intermediate VII can be conjugated to a cell binding agent to provide conjugates of the present invention. As an alternative Sonogishira reaction, intermediate IV can be coupled to an acetyiamine, such as propargylamine in the presence of palladium and copper cataiysis and base. Such a reaction provides part of a tether attached to the PBD dimer bridge where the aclyne group is preserved and a free terminal amine is available for further reaction. For example, the reaction of intermediate IV with propargylamine provides intermediate V i .

The terminal amine of intermediate Vlil can be reacted with, for example, a carboxylic acid group attached to a linker/reactive group G (for connecting to a ceil binding agent) to provide intermediate IX.

As an alternative synthesis of intermediate IX. the carboxylic acid group of intermediate X I can be reacted with propargylamine to form intermediate XI . Reaction of intermediate IV with intermediate XII in a Sonogoshira reaction yiedls intermediate Χ Ι.

The protected amine group terminated the variable PEG chain can be d protected and reacted with the carboxylic acid group of intermediate X!V in order to couple the linker/reactive group G onto the PBD dimer and produce intermediate XIV. intermediate IV may also used in a cross-coupling amination reaction, such as a Buchwaid-Hartwig amination. A carbon-nitrogen bond is formed via a palladium-catalysed cross-coupling of an amine with an aryl halide. A number of palladium catalysts for use in such cross-coupiing reactions are known, such as Pd(Ph3)4 or RuPhos/RuPhosPd.

Reaction of intermediate IV with a piperizine functionlised with a protected propan-1 -amine provides intermediate XV. The protected amine of intermediate XV can be further reacted with, for example, a carboxylic acid group attached to a linker/reactive group, G, for connecting to a cell binding agent to provide intermediate XVL

Cross-coupiing amination reaction, such as a Buchwaid-Hartwig amination, of intermediate V with a partially protected piperazine followed by deprotection (for example with trif!uoroacetic acid) provides intermediate XVII.

The deprotected piperazine amine group of intermediate XV can be reacted with a carboxylic acid group in intermediate XV I to provide intermediate XIX. intermediate XXI can be used to form the oxime intermediate XXiV For example, a partialiy protected PEG-diamine, intermediate XXI i , may be reacted with the carboxyiic acid group of intermediate X!V. Deprotection yields intermediate X .

Reaction of intermediates XX! and XXIII yields oxime intermediate XXIV. The syn and anti oximes can be resolved using preparative HPLC. intermediate XX can also be used to form the acryiamide intermediate XXVil. For example, the aldehyde intermediate XX can be reacted with malonic acid in a Knoevenagel condensation to yield the acryciic acid intermediate XXV. This can be reacted with a partialiy protected PEG-diamine to yield intermediate XXV! . Deprotectopm and coupling with intermediate X V yield the acryiamide intermediate XXVil

The synthesis of PBD compounds containing two imine moieties is extensively discussed in the following references, which discussions are incorporated herein by reference: a) WO 00/12508 (pages 14 to 30); b) WO 2005/023814 (pages 3 to 10); c) WO 2005/085259 (pages 3 1 to 39) d) WO 20 1/128650 (pages 2 to 12 and 42 to 51); e) PCT/EP201 2/070232, filed 12 October 2012 (pages 2 to 15 and 49 to 58).

E mj j s General Experimental Methods Optical rotations were measured on an ADP 220 polarimeter (Bellingham Stanley Ltd.) and concentrations (c) are given in g/100mL Melting points were measured using a digital melting point apparatus (Electrothermal). IR spectra were recorded on a Perkin-Elmer Spectrum 1000 FT R Spectrometer. H and C NMR spectra were acquired at 300 K using a Bruker Avance NMR spectrometer at 400 and 00 MHz, respectively. Chemical shifts are reported relative to TMS (8 = 0.0 pp ), and signals are designated as s (singlet), d (doublet), t (triplet), dt (double triplet), dd (doublet of doublets), ddd (double doublet of doublets) or m

(mu!tipiet), with coupling constants given in Hertz (Hz). Mass spectroscopy (MS) data were collected using a Waters Micromass ZQ instrument coupled to a Waters 2695 HPLC with a Waters 2996 PDA. Wafers Micromass ZQ parameters used were: Capillary (kV), 3.38; Cone (V), 35; Extractor (V), 3.0; Source temperature (°C), 100; Desolvation Temperature (°C), 200: Cone flow rate (L/h), 50; De-solvation flow rate (L/h), 250. High-resolution mass spectroscopy (HRMS) data were recorded on a Waters Micromass QTOF Global in positive W-mode using metal-coated borosilicate glass tips to introduce the samples into the instrument. Thin Layer Chromatography (TLC) was performed on silica gel aluminium plates

(Merck 60, F254), and flash chromatography utilised silica gel (Merck 60, 230-400 mesh AST . All chemicals and solvents were purchased from Sigma-A!drich and were used as supplied without further purification .

LC/ S conditions Method A: The HPLC (Waters Alliance 2695) was run using a mobile phase of water (A) (formic acid 0.1%) and acetonitrile (B) (formic acid 0.1%). Gradient: initial composition 5% B over 1.0 min then 5% B to 95% B within 3 min. The composition was held for 0.5 min at 95% B, and then returned to 5% B in 0.3 minutes. Total gradient run time equals 5 min. Flow rate 3.0 mL/min, 400pL was split via a zero dead volume tee piece which passes into the mass spectrometer. Wavelength detection range: 220 to 400 nm.

Function type: diode array (535 scans). Column: Phenomenex ® Onyx Monolithic C 18 50 x 4.60 mm.

LC/MS conditions --- Method B: The HPLC (Waters Alliance 2695) was run using a mobile phase of water (A) (formic acid 0.1%) and acetonitrile (B) (formic acid 0.1%). Gradient: initial composition 5% B held over 1.0 min, then increase from 5% B to 95% B over a 2.5 min period. The composition was held for 0.5 min at 95% B, then returned to 5% B in 0.1 minutes and hold there for 0.9 min. Total gradient run time equals 5 min. Flow rate 3.0 mL/min, 400 L was split via a zero dead volume tee piece which passes into the mass spectrometer. Wavelength detection range: 220 to 400 nm. Function type: diode array (535 scans). Column: Phenomenex Onyx Monolithic C 8 50 x 4.60 mm.

LC/MS conditions --- Method C: Positive mode electrospray mass spectrometry was performed using a Shirnadzu Nexera®/Prominence® LCMS-2020. Mobile phases used were solvent A (H20 with 0 .1% formic acid) and solvent B (CH3CN with 0.1% formic acid). Gradient: Initial composition 5% B held over 0.25 min, then increased from 5% B to 100% B over a 2 min period. The composition was held for 0.50 min at 100% B, then returned to 5% B in 0.05 min and held there for 0.05 min . The total duration of the gradient run was 3.0 min .

Flow rate was 0.8 mL/min. Detection was at 2 14 and 254 nm. Column : Waters Acquity

UPLC© BEH Shield RP1 8 1.7 µ ηΊ 2.1 x 50 mm at 50 °C.

The preparative HPLC conditions for Examples 2 and 3 were as follows: Reverse-phase ultra-fast high-performance liquid chromatography (UFLC) was carried out on a Shirnadzu

Prominence© machine using Phenomenex© Gemini NX 5µ C 18 columns (at 50 °C) of the following dimensions: 150 x 4 8 mm for analysis, and 150 x 21.2 m for preparative work.

Eluents used were solvent A (H20 with 0.1% formic acid) and solvent B (CH 3CN with 0.1% formic acid). All UFLC experiments were performed with gradient conditions: From 0 to 30 min the composition of B was increased from 0 to 100% and held at 100% B for a further 2 min. The composition of B was decreased from 100% to 0% from 32.0 min to 32.1 min and held at 0% B until 35.0 min. The total duration of the gradient run was 35.0 min. Flow rates used were 1.0 mL/min for analytical, and 20.0 mL/min for preparative HPLC. Detection was at 254 and 280 nm.

LC/ S conditions - Method D: Shimazu LCMS-2020, using a mobile phase of water (A) (formic acid 0.1%) and acetonitriie (B) (formic acid 0.1%). Gradient: initial composition 5% B held over 0.25 min, then increase from 5% B to 00% B over a 2 min period. The composition was held for 0.50 min at 100% B, then returned to 5% B in 0.05 minutes and hold there for 0.05 min. Total gradient run time equals 3 min. Flow rate 0.8 mL/min. Wavelength detection range: 190 to 800 nm. Oven temperature: 50°C. Column: Kinetex 2.6u XB-C18 100A 50x2.10 mm.

LC/MS conditions - Method E: Shimazu LCMS-2020, using a mobile phase of water (A) (formic acid 0.1%) and acetonitriie (B) (formic acid 0.1%). Gradient: initial composition 5% B held over 1 min, then increase from 5% B to 100% B over a 9 min period. The composition was held for 2 min at 100% B, then returned to 5% B in 0.10 minutes and hold there for 3 min. Total gradient run time equals 15 min. Flow rate 0.6 mL/min. Wavelength detection range: 190 to 800 nm. Oven temperature: 50°C. Column: Gemini-NX 3u C18 11OA 100x2.00 mm.

Synthesis of Intermediates

-1 yl)carbamate (13)

EDC (263 mg, .37 mmo!, 1 eq) was added to a solution of propargy!amine (88 . 1.37

mo , 1 eq) and t-boc-N-arnido-dPEG® -acid (385.42 m o , 1.37 m o , 1 eq) in dichioromethane (10 mL). The reaction was stirred at room temperature for 3 hours after which full conversion was observed by TLC The reaction mixture was diluted in dichloromethane and washed with water and brine. The organic layer was dried over magnesium sulphate, filtered and excess dichloromethane was removed by rotary evaporation under reduced pressure. The resulting residue was subjected to flash column chromatography (silica gel; gradient, 0% to 10% methanol in dichloromethane). Pure fractions were collected and combined and excess eiuent was removed by rotary evaporation under reduced pressure to give the product 3 (490 mg, 88%). H R (400 δ MHz, CDC! 3) 6.90 (s, 1H), 5.06 (d, J = 23.2 Hz, 1H), 4.03 (dd, J = 5.3, 2.5 Hz, 2H), 3.72 (t, J = 5.7 Hz, 2H), 3.69 - 3.57 (m, 12H), 3.53 (t, J = 5.1 Hz, 2H), 3.30 (d, J = 5.0 Hz, 2H), 2.49

(t, J = 5.7 Hz, 2H), 2.20 (t, J = 2.5 Hz, H), 1.43 (s, 9H).

Example 1

(a) (11S,1 1aS, 11'S, 11a'S)-di-ieii~butyi 8,8'-(((5-halo-1,3- phenylene)bis(methylene))bis(oxy))bis(7-methoxy-5<>xo-11-((tetrah

2,3,11, 11a-tetrahydro-1H pyrroh[2,1 -c][1,4]benzodiazepine~1 0(5H)-carboxyiat.e) (2a, 2b, 2c)

2b: X 2c: X ! (i) (11S,1 1aS, 11'S : 11a S)-di-tert-bufyl 8, 8'-(((5-iodo- 1, 3 phenylene)bis(methylene))bis(oxy))bis(7-methoxy-5

K2CO3 (647 mg, 4.68 mmol) in dry D F (30 mL). The reaction mixture was heated to 60 °C and stirred under an argon atmosphere for 3 hours at which point analysis by LC/MS revealed substantial product formation at retention time 4.00 min (ES+) mlz 1125 {[M+ Hj -50% relative intensity). The reaction mixture was allowed to cool to room temperature and the DMF was removed by evaporation in vacuo. The resulting residue was partitioned between water (50 mL) and EtOAc (50 mL) and the aqueous phase was extracted with EtOAc (3 15 mL). The combined organic layers were washed with water (2 x 20 mL). brine

(40 mL), dried (MgS0 4), filtered and evaporated in vacuo to provide the crude product. Purification by flash chromatography (gradient elution: 50:50 v/v EtOAc/hexane to 100% EiOAc) gave the bis-ether 2a as a white foam (2.05 g, 78% yield): H NMR (400 MHz, δ CDC!3) (mixture of 3 diastereoisomers) 7.78-7.74 (m, 2H), 7.50 (d, 1H, J = 4.76 Hz), 7.26 (s, 1H), 7.22 (s, 1H), 6.87 (s, 1H), 6.51 (s, 1H), 5.80 (d, 1H, J = 8.52 Hz), 5.70 (d, 1H, J = 9.44 Hz), 5.16-4.95 (m, 8H), 3.93-3.87 (m, 8H). 3.74-3.40 (m. 8H), 2.22-1 .99 (m, 8H),

13 δ 1.79-1 .22 (m, 30H); C NMR (100 MHz, CDC 3) (mixture of 3 diastereossomers) 167.4, 167.2, 154.9, 149.6, 149.4, 149.2, 148.8, 139.6, 139.4, 135.6 (x2), 129.8, 129.6, 127.9,

127.4, 125.0, 116.0, 115.8, 111.0, 110.4, 100.8, 95.8, 94.8, 91.2, 88.2, 8 1.4, 80.9, 70.4, 70.0, 64.9, 63.4, 60.2, 60.0, 56.2, 56.1 (x2), 46.3, 31.4, 30.9, 29.2, 28.9, 28.2, 28.1 , 25.3, 23.3, 23.2, 20.9, 19 9.

(ii) (11 S, 11aS, 11 , 11a'S)-di-tert-butyl 8,8'-(((5-bromo-1,3- phenylene)bis(methylene))bis(oxy))bis(7-methoxy-5-oxo-11-((tetrah

2,3, 11, 11a-tetrahydro-1 H~pyrro!o[2, 1-c][1,4]benzodiazepine-10(5H)-carboxylate) (2b). 1-bromo-3,5-bis(bromomethyi)benzene (331 mg, 0.97 mmo!) was added to a stirred solution of Boc/THP-protected PBD capping unit 1 (876 mg, 1.95 mmol), TBA! (36 mg, 97.4 o ) and K2C0 3 (270 mg, 1.95 mmol) in dry DMF (16 mL). The reaction mixture was heated to 60 °C and stirred under an argon atmosphere for 2.5 hours at which point analysis by LC/MS revealed substantial product formation at retention time 4.00 min (ES+) /z 1079 ([M+ -95% relative intensity). The reaction mixture was allowed to cool to room temperature and the DMF was removed by evaporation in vacuo. The resulting residue was partitioned between water (25 mL) and DCM (25 mL) and the aqueous phase was extracted with DCM (3 10 mL). The combined organic layers were washed with water (20 mL), brine (30 mL), dried (MgS0 4), filtered and evaporated in vacuo to provide the crude product. Purification by flash chromatography (gradient elution: 50:50 v/v EtOAc/hexane to 100% EtOAc) gave the bis-ether 2b as a white foam (725 mg, 69% yield): H NMR (400 MHz, CDC!3) (mixture of 3 diastereoisomers) δ 7.57-7.53 (m, 2H), 7.50 (d, 1H, J = 4.92 Hz), 7.27 (s, 1H), 7.22 (s, 1H),

6.87 (s, 1H), 6.51 (s, 1H), 5.80 (d, 1H, J 7.88 Hz), 5.70 (d, 1H, = 9.36 Hz), 5.18-4.94 (m, 6H), 3.93-3.85 (m, 8H), 3.75-3.40 (m, 8H), 2.14-1 .99 (m, 8H), 1.79-1.22 (m, 30H); C δ NMR (100 MHz, CDCI 3) (mixture of 3 diastereoisomers) 167.4, 167.2, 154.9, 149.6, 149.4, 149.2, 148.8, 139.6, 139.4, 129.8, 127.9, 128.0, 127.4, 124.2, 123.2, 116.0, 115.8, 111.0,

110.4, 100.9, 95.8, 9 1.3, 88.2, 8 1.3, 80.9, 70.5, 70.1, 64.9, 63.4, 60.2, 60.0, 56.2, 56.1, 46.4,

3 1.4, 30.9, 29.2, 28.9, 28.2, 28.1, 25.3, 23.3, 23.1, 20.9, 19.9.

( i) (11 S, 11aS, 11'S, 11a'S)-di~tert~butyi 8,8'-(((5-ch!oro~1,3~ pheny!ene)bis(methylene))bis(oxy))bis(7-methoxy-5-oxo- 11-((tetrahydro-2H-pyran-2-yi)oxy)-

2,3, 11, 1 1a-tetrahydro-1 H-benzo[e]pyrrolo[1,2-a][ 1,4]diazepine-10(5H)-carboxylate) (2c) 1,3-bis(bromomethyi)-5-chorobenzene (470 mg, 1.57 mmoi) was added to a stirred solution of Boc/THP-protected PBD capping unit 1 (1.41 g, 3.15 mmol), TBA (58 mg, 0.16 mmo!) and K2CO3 (435 mg, 3.15 mmol) in dry DMF (20 mL). The reaction mixture was heated to 60 °C and stirred under an argon atmosphere for 2 hours at which point analysis by LC/MS (Method A) revealed substantial product formation at retention time 1.94 min (ES+) /z 1033 ([M+ Hj + -50% relative intensity). The reaction mixture was allowed to cool to room temperature and the DMF was removed by evaporation in vacuo. The resulting residue was partitioned between water (50 mL) and EtOAc (50 mL) and the aqueous phase was extracted with EtOAc (3 x 5 mL). The combined organic layers were washed with water (2 x

20 mL), brine (40 mL), dried (MgS0 ), filtered and evaporated in vacuo to provide the crude product. Purification by flash chromatography (gradient eiution: 50:50 v/v EtOAc/hexane to 100% EtOAc) gave the bis-ether 2c as a white foam (825 mg, 51% yield).

(b) (11 S, 11aS, 11'S, 11a'S)-di4ert-butyl 8: 8'-(((5-ethynyi-1 ,3- pheny!ene}bis(methylene})bis(oxy)}his(7-meihoxy-5~oxo~11-((tefrahydro-2H

2,3, 11, 11a-tefrahydro-1H-pyrrolo[2, 1-c][1,4]benzodiazepine-10(5H)-carboxylate) (4)

(i) (11 S, 11aS, 11'S, 11a'S)-di-tert-butyl 8,8'-(((5~((trimethyisifyi}eihynyl)-1,3- phenyiene}bis(methyiene})bis(oxy)}his(7-meihoxy-5~oxo~11-((tefrahydro-2H

2,3, 11, 11a-tetrahydro-1H-pyrrolo[2, 1-c][1,4]benzodiazepine-10(5H)-carboxylate) (3).

A catalytic amount of Pd(PPh 3) (14.9 mg, 12.9 o ) was added to a mixture of the bis- ether 2a (721 mg, 0.64 mmol), TMS-acetylene (273 µ , 190 mg, 1.93 mmoi), Cu (4.9 mg,

25.8 o ), diethy!amine ( 1 .33 mL, 942 mg, 12.9 mmol) and oven-dried 4A molecular sieve pellets in dry DMF (4.8 mL) in an oven-dried sealabie vessel. The mixture was degased and flushed with argon 3 times then heated in a microwave at 100 °C for 1.5 hours at which point analysis by LC/MS (Method A) revealed complete consumption of starting material and substantial product formation at retention time 4.27 min (ES+) m/z 1096 ([A + Hp, -35% relative intensity). Peak at retention time 3.82 min (ES+) m/z 1023 ([M+ H]+ -35% relative intensity) observed which corresponds to TMS-cieavage under LC/MS conditions (Method A). The reaction mixture was allowed to cool to room temperature and was then filtered through a sinter to remove the sieves (washed with DMF). The fiitrate was evaporated in vacuo and the resulting residue subjected to flash chromatography (gradient eiution : 50:50 v/v EtOAc/hexane to 00% EtOAc) to provide the TMS-acetylene 3 as a yellow foam (656 δ mg, 93% yield): H N R (400 MHz, CDCI3) (mixture of 3 diastereoisomers) 7.52-7.46 (m, 3H), 7.26 (s, 1H), 7.2 1 (s, 1H), 6.87 (s, 1H), 6.51 (s, 1H), 5.80 (d, 1H, J = 8.68 Hz), 5.69 (d,

1H, J = 9.36 Hz), 5.18-4.94 (m, 6H), 3.93-3.86 (m, 8H), 3.73-3.40 (m, 8H), 2.1 3-1 .97 (m, δ 8H), 1.78-1 .22 (m, 30H), 0.22, 0.23 and 0.24 (sx3, 9H); C NMR ( 100 MHz, CDC 3) 167.6, 167.4, 155.2, 155.0, 149.9, 149.6, 149.2, 148.8, 137.8, 137.6, 130.2, 129.9, 129.7, 127.8,

127.2, 125.8, 124.4, 116.0, 115.8, 111.0, 110.4, 104.4, 10 1.0, 95.8, 9 1.4, 88.3, 81.4, 8 1.0,

7 1.0, 70.6, 65.0, 63.5, 60.3, 60. 1, 56.2, 46 4, 3 1.0, 29.2, 29.0, 28.2, 25.4, 23.4, 23.3, 2 1.1, 20.0, 0.28, 0.09, 0.00, -0.28.

(ii) ( 11S, 11aS, 11'S, 11a'S)-di-tert-butyl 8,8'-(((5-ethynyl-1 ,3- phenylene)bis(methylene))bis(oxy))bis(7-methoxy-5-oxo-1 1-((tetran^

2,3, 11, 11a-tetrahydro-1H-pyrrolo[2, 1-c][1,4]benzodiazepine-10(5H)-carboxy!ate) (4).

Solid K2C0 3 (296 mg, 2.14 mmol ) was added to a stirred solution of the TMS-protected compound 3 ( 1 .1 7 g, 1.07 mmol) in MeOH (20 mL). After 3 hours stirring at room temperature the reaction was deemed to be complete as judged by LC/MS (Method A) [desired product peak at retention time 3.82 min (ES+) mlz 1023 ([M+ H]+ , 30% relative intensity)]. The MeOH was removed by evaporation in vacuo and the resulting residue was partitioned between water (25 mL) and EtOAc (25 mL). The layers were separated and the aqueous phase was extracted with EtOAc (3 5 mL). The combined organic layers were washed with water (3 x 30 mL), brine (40 mL), dried (Mg8Q 4) , filtered and evaporated in vacuo to provide the crude product. Purification by flash chromatography (gradient eiution :

50:50 v/v EtOAc/hexane to 100% EtOAc) gave the acetylene 4 as an orange foam ( 1 .02 g, 94% yield: H NMR (400 MHz, CDC ) (mixture of 3 diastereoisomers) δ 7.55-7.52 (m, 3H),

7.26 (s, H), 7.22 (s, 1H), 6.88 (s, 1H), 6.51 (s, 1H), 5.80 (d, 1H, J ~ 8.68 Hz), 5.69 (d, 1H, J 9.48 Hz), 5.1 8-4.94 (m, 6H), 3.93-3.86 (m, 8H), 3.73-3.40 (m, 8H), 3.09 and 3.08 (sx3,

1H), 2.1 3-1 .97 ( , 8H), 1.78- 1.22 (m, 30H); C NMR (100 MHz, CDCI3) (mixture of 3 diastereoisomers) δ 167.5, 167.3, 155.2, 149.7, 149.5, 149. 1, 148.8, 137.8, 137.7, 130.3, 129.8, 129.6, 127.8, 127.2, 126. 1, 123.2, 115.9, 115.7, 110.9, 110.4, 100.9, 100.0, 95.7,

9 1.3, 88.2, 82.9, 8 1.3, 80.9, 78.0, 70.7, 70.4, 64.9, 63.4, 60.2, 60.0, 56. 1, 46.3, 31.4, 30.9, 29.2, 28.9, 28. 1 (x2), 25.3, 23.3, 23.2, 20.9, 19.9.

(c) ( 1 1S, 11aS, 11'S, 11a'Sj-di-teri-butyi 8,8'-(((5-(1-(2-(2-(2-(2- aminoethoxy)ethoxy)ethoxy)ethyl)- 1H-1, 2, 3-triazol-4-yl)- 1, 3- phenylene)bis(methylene))bis(oxy))bis(7-methoxy-5-oxo-11-((tetrahydi& 2 11,1 1a-tetrahydro-1 H-pyrroio[2, 1-c][ 1,4]benzodiazepine-10(5H)-carboxyiate) (5).

µ ιο Solid CuS0 .5H20 (10.3 nig, 4 1.4 ) and (+)-sodium L-ascorbate (33.0 mg, 0.17 mmo!) were added to a stirred soiution of 1-Azido-3,6,9-trioxaundecan-1-amine (181 mg, 164 µ _,

0.83 mmo!) and the aikyne 4 (846 mg, 0.83 mmol) in fert-BuOH (5 mL) and H20 (5 mL) at room temperature. A colour change from yei!ow to green was observed as the reaction progressed. After stirring for 1.5 hours analysis by LC/MS (Method A) revealed a substantial of amount of desired product formed corresponding to peak at retention time 3.02 min (ES+) nv'z 1242 {[M+ H]+ , -35% relative intensity). [NOTE: On some occasions reaction progress stalled, however, the reaction was driven to completion upon addition of further CuS0 .5H20 (0.05 equivalents) and (+)-sodium L-ascorbate (0.2 equivalents)]. The reaction mixture was partitioned (without shaking of the separating funnel) between water (50 mL) and EtOAc (50 mL). The aqueous phase was extracted with EtOAc (3 x 20 mL) and the combined organic layers were washed with water (20 mL), brine (30 mL), dried (MgSG4), filtered and evaporated in vacuo to provide the crude product 5 as a green foam (8 mg, 80% crude yield). The crude product was carried through to next step without further purification: H δ R (400 MHz, CDCI3) (mixture of 3 diastereoisomers) 7.98-7.83 (m, 3H), 7.55-7.48 (br s, H), 7.31-7.22 (m, 2H), 6.96 (br s, 1H), 6.57 (s, 1H), 5.85-5.78 (m, 1H), 5.72-5.68 (m, 1H), 5.18-4.94 (m, 6H), 4.60-4.50 (m, 2H), 3.93-3.80 (m, 12H), 3.73-3.40 (m, 12H), 2.13- 1.80 (m, 8H), 1.71-1.10 (m, 30H).

(d) ( 1IS, 11aS, 1VS,1 1a'S)~di-tert-butyl 8,8'~(((5~(1-(18~(2,5-dioxo-2,5-dihydro~1H~pyrrQl-1-y!)-

13-QXQ-3, 6,9-trioxa- 12-azaoctadecyl)- 1H-1, 2,34nazol~4~y!)~ 1, 3- phenylene)bis(methylene))bis(oxy))bis(7~methoxy-5-oxo~ 11-((tetrahydro-2H-pyran-2-yi)oxy)~ 2,3, 11,1 1a-tetrahydro-1 H-pyrrolo[2, 1~c][1,4] benzodiazepine~1Q(5H)-carboxy1ate) (6) Solid 6-ma!eimidohexanoic acid /V-hydroxysuccinimide ester ( 36 mg, 0.44 mmoi) was added to a stirred solution of the primary amine 5 (523 mg, 0.42 mmoi) in dry DCM ( 10 mL) at room temperature. Progress was monitored by LC/MS (Method A) and after 3 days stirring the reaction proceeded no further, a substantial amount of desired product was observed at retention time 3.48 min (ES+) iz 1434 ([M+ Hp, -30% relative intensity) accompanied by a shoulder peak at retention time 3.40 min and unreached starting material at retention lime 3.02 min. The reaction mixture was treated with silica gel and the solvent removed by evaporation in vacuo. The resulting residue was subjected to flash chromatography (gradient eiution : 100% DCM to 97:3 v/v DCM/MeOH) to give the maleimide 6 as a white foam (253 δ mg, 42% yield): H NMR (400 MHz, CDC! 3) (mixture of 3 diastereoisomers) 8.05-7.99 (m, 1H), 7.92-7.87 (m, 2H), 7.56, 7.55 and 7 53 (sx3, H), 7.26 and 7 22 (sx2, 2H), 6.94 (s, 1H),

6.66 (s, 2H), 6.58 (s, 1H), 6.04 (br s, 1H), 5.80 (d, 1H , =6.88 Hz), 5.70 (d, 1H, J = 9 .16 Hz),

5.24-4.94 (m, 6H ), 4.6Q (t, 2H, J = 4.68 Hz), 3.95-3.86 (m, 0H), 3.69-3.37 (m, 22H), 2 .15-

1.97 (m, 10H), 1.75-122 (m, 36H); C NMR ( 100 Hz, CDCI3) (mixture of 3 diastereoisomers) δ 172.8, 170.8, 167.6, 167.4, 149. 1, 137.9, 134. 1, 129.8, 124.2, 115.8,

115.6, 110.3, 95.8, 7 1 .1 , 70.8, 70.6, 70.5 (x2), 70.2, 69.9, 69.5, 63.4, 60.2, 56. 1, 53.4, 50.5,

46.4, 39. 1, 37.7, 36.3, 3 1.4, 30.9, 29.2, 28.9, 28.3, 28.1 , 26.4, 25.3 (x2), 25. 1, 23.3, 23.2, 19.9

(e) N-(2-(2-(2-(2-(4-(3,5-bis((((S)-7-methoxy-5-oxo-2, 3,5, 11a~tetrahydro-1H-pyrrolo[2, 1- c][ 1,4]benzodiazepin-8-yl)oxy)methyl)phenyl)- 1H-1,2, 3-triazol-1- yl)ethoxy)ethoxy)ethoxy)ethyl)-6-(2,5

NaHC0 3 (50 mL). The mixture was extracted with DC (3 x 15 mL) and the combined organic layers washed with brine (20 mL), dried ( gS0 ), filtered and evaporated in vacuo to provide the crude product. Purification by ash chromatography (gradient elution: 00%

CHCI to 97:3 v/v CH ¾/ eOH) gave the title compound as an orange foam ( 1 27 mg, 70% yield).

(a) ( 11S, 11aS, 11'S, 11a'S)-di-tert~butyi 8,8'-(((5-(3-aminoprop-1-yn-1-yl)-1,3- phenylene)bis(methyiene))bis(oxy))bis(7-methoxy-5<>xo-1 1-((tetrah

2,3 11, 11a-tetrahydro-1 H-benzo[e]pyrrolo[1 ,2-a][ 1,4]diazepine-10(5H)-carboxyiafe) (8)

A catalytic amount of Pd(PPh 3)4 (2.05 mg, 1.75 oi) was added to a mixture of the bis- ether a ( 100 mg, 0.089 mmol), propargylamine ( 17 L, 15 mg, 0.26 mmol), Cui (0.65 mg, 3.5 rno ), diethy!amine (18 L, 3 mg, 1.75 mmol) and oven-dried 4A molecular sieve pellets n dry DMF (1.5 mL) in an oven-dried sealabie vessel. The mixture was degased and flushed with argon 3 times then heated at 100°C for 2 hours in the sealed vessel. At this point analysis by LC/MS (Method C) revealed complete consumption of starting material and substantial product formation at retention time 1.36 min (ES+) miz 1052.95 ([M+ H 100% relative intensity). The reaction mixture was allowed to cool to room temperature and was then filtered through a sinter to remove the sieves (washed with DMF). The filtrate was evaporated in vacuo to provide unstable crude product 8 which was used immediately in the next step without purification or analysis.

(b) ( 1IS, 11aS, 11'S,1 1a'S)~di-tert-butyi 8,8'-(({5-(1-(2,5-dioxo-2,5

3, W-dioxo-7, 10, 13, 16-tetraoxa-4,20-diazatri ∞ s-22-yn-23-yl)-1,3- phenylene)bis(methylene))his(oxy))bis(7-methoxy-5<>xo-11-((tetrah 2,3, 11,1 1a-tetrahydro-1H-benzo[e]pyrrolo[1,2-a][1,4]diazepine-10(5H)-carboxylate) (9) MAL-dPEG@4-acid (37 mg, 0.089 mmol) was added to a stirred solution of EDC (1 mg, 0.089 mmol) and the crude primary amine 8 in dry DC (4 mL) at room temperature. The reaction mixture was stirred under an argon atmosphere for 3 hours at which point analysis by LC/MS (Method C) showed a substantial amount of desired product at retention time 1.69 min (ES+) miz 1450.55 M+ Hp, 0% relative intensity), 1498 ([M+ Nap, -80% relative intensity). The reaction mixture was diluted with DCM (30 mL) and washed with 0 (3 x 0 mL), brine (20 mL), dried (MgS0 ), filtered and evaporated in vacuo to provide the crude product. Purification by flash chromatography (gradient elution: 100% DCM to 96:4 v/v DCM/MeOH) gave maieimide 9 as a foam (80 mg, 82% yie!d over 2 steps).

(c) N-(3-(3,5-bis((((S)-7-methoxy-5-oxo-2,3,5, 11a-tetrahydro-1 H-benzo[e]pyrroio[1 ,2- a][1,4]diazepin-8-yl)oxy)methyl)phenyl)prop-2-yn- 1-yi)-1~(3-(2, 5-dioxo~2,5-dihydro-1 H-pyrrol-

1-yl)propanamido)-3, 6,9, 12-tetraoxapentadecan- 15-amide ( 10)

A solution of 95:5 v/v TFA/H 0 ( 1 mL) was added to a sample of the Boc/THP-protected compound 9 (80 mg, 55 pmo ) at 0 °C (ice/acetone). After stirring at 0 °C for 1 hour, the reaction was deemed complete as judged by LC/MS (Method C), desired product peak at retention time 1.24 min (ES+) miz 1046.35 [M+ Hp, 100% relative intensity). The reaction mixture was kept cold and added drop wise to a chilled saturated aqueous solution of

NaHC0 3 (50 mL). The mixture was extracted with DCM (3 x 5 mL) and the combined organic layers washed with brine (40 mL), dried (MgS0 ), filtered and evaporated in vacuo to provide the crude product. Purification by flash chromatography (gradient elution: 00%

CHCI3 to 98:4 v/v CHC 3/MeOH) gave 10 as an orange solid (9 mg, 16% yield). xample 3

(a) (11 S, 11aS, 11'S, 11a'S)-di-tert-butyl 8 (((5-(4-(teii-butoxycarboiiy!}piperazin-1-yi)-1,3- phenylene)bis(methylene))bis(oxy))bis(7-methoxy-5-oxo-11-((tetrahy

2,3, 11,1 1a-tetrahydro-1 H-benzo[e]pyrrolo[ 1,2-a][ 1,4]diazepine-10(5H)-carboxylate) (11) A catalytic amount of RuPhosPd (15.8 mg, 0.019 mmol) was added to a mixture of the bis- ether 2c (200 mg, 0.19 mmol), 1-Boc-piperazine (39.8 mg, 0.21 mmol), CsC0 3 (157 mg, 0.48 mmol) and RuPhos (9 mg, 0.019 mmol) in dry THF (4 rriL) n an oven-dried sealable vessel. The mixture was degased and flushed with argon 3 times then heated in a preheated drysyn at 85 °C for 2h letting the pressure to build up in the vial. At this point, analysis by LC/ S (Method C) revealed complete consumption of starting material and substantial product formation at retention time 1.97 min (ES+) m!z 1083.45 ([M+ H] 5% relative intensity). The reaction mixture was allowed to cool to room temperature and diluted with ethyl acetate (50 mL) The organics were washed with H 0 (2 x 25 m!_) and brine (25 mL) before being dried over MgS0 , filtered and the volatiies removed under reduced pressure. The crude material was purified by silica gel chromatography column (gradient eiution: 100%

CHCIato 9:1 v/v CHCI3 eOH) and isolated pure as a white foam (210 mg, 91% yield).

(b) ( 11aS, 11a'S)-8,8'-(((5-(piperazin-1-yi)-1,3-phenylene)bis(methylene))bis^ methoxy-2,3-dihydro-1H-benzo[e]pyrrob[1,2-a][1A]diazepin-5(11aH)-one) (12)

A solution of 95:5 v/v TFA/H 0 ( 1 mL) was added to a sample of the Boc/THP-protected compound (100 mg, 0.084 mmol) at 0 °C (ice/water). After stirring at 0 °C for 1 hour, the reaction was deemed complete as judged by LC/MS (Method C), desired product peak at retention time 1.02 min (no ionisation observed for this compound). The reaction mixture was kept cold and added drop wise to a chilled saturated aqueous solution of NaHC0 3 (50 mL). The mixture was extracted with DCM (3 5 mL) and the combined organic layers washed with brine (40 mL), dried (MgS0 ) , filtered and evaporated in vacuo to provide the crude product which was used as such in the next step.

(c) N-(15-(4-(3,5-bis(({(S)-7-methoxy-5-oxo~2,3,5, 11a-tetrahydro-1H-benzo[e]pyrrolo[1,2- a][1,4]diazepin-8-yl)oxy)methyl)phenyi)piperazin-1-yl)-15<>xo-3^

3-(2,5-dioxo-2,5-dihydro- 1H-pyrroi- 1~y ) propanamide (13) MAL-dPEG®4-acid (35 mg, 0.084 mmol) was added to a stirred solution of EDC (16 mg, 0.084 mmol) and the crude primary amine in dry DCM (3 mL) at room temperature. The reaction mixture was stirred under an argon atmosphere for 3 hours at which point analysis by LC/MS (Method C) showed a substantial amount of desired product at retention time 1.24 + min (ES+) m'z 1077.40 { ->- ] , 90% relative intensity). The reaction mixture was diluted with DCM (30 mL) and washed with H20 (3 x 10 mL), brine (20 mL), dried (MgS0 ), filtered and evaporated in vacuo to provide the crude product. Purification by preparatory UPLC

(gradient elution: 87:13 v/v H20/CH 3CN to 15:75 v/v H20/CH 3CN over 11 min) gave final product as a light brown oil (4.7 mg, 5% yield over 2 steps).

Example 4 (a) (S)-(2-amino-5-methoxy-4-((tnisopropylsiiyl)oxy)phenyl)(2-(((te^ utyld eth ls y!)ox )me h )-4- eth 2,3 i drO 1H rro 1-yί)me hanone (17)

16 7 (i) (S)-5-(((tert-butyldimethylsilyi)oxy)methyi)-1-(5-methoxy-2-nitro-4- ((tnisopropy1siiyi)oxy)benzoyi)-4,5-dihydro~1H~pyrroi-3-yi trifluoromethanesulfonate (15) Trif!ic anhydride (26 L, 155 mmol, 3 eq) was injected (temperature controlled) to a vigorously stirred suspension of ketone 4 (30 g , 52 mmol, 1 eq) in dry dichioromethane

(500 mL) in the presence of 2,6-lutidine (24 mL, 207 mmol, 4 eq, dried over sieves) at -50°C (acetone/dry ice bath). The reaction mixture was allowed to stir for 1 hour. Water was added to the still cold reaction mixture and the organic layer was separated and washed with saturated sodium bicarbonate, brine and magnesium sulphate. The organic phase was filtered and excess solvent was removed by rotary evaporation under reduced pressure. The residue was subjected to column flash chromatography (silica gel; 5% ethyl acetate/hexane). Pure fractions were collected and combined, and excess eluent was removed by rotary evaporation under reduced pressure afforded the product 15 (31 .5 g, 86 %). LC/ S, method

B, 4.32 min (ES+) /z (relative intensity) 7 12.89 ([Af + H , 100); H N R (400 MHz, CDCI3)

7.71 (s, 1H), 6.75 (s, 1H), 6.05 (d, J = 1.8 Hz, 1H), 4.78 (dd, J = 9.8, 5.5 Hz, H), 4.1 5

3.75 (m, 5H), 3.1 7 (ddd, = 16.2, 10.4, 2.3 Hz, 1H), 2.99 (ddd, J - 16.3, 4 0, 1.6 Hz, 1H),

1 45 - 1.1 9 (m, 3H), 1.15 - 1.08 (m, 18H), 1.05 (s, 6H), 0.95 - 0.87 (m, 9H), 0.15 - 0.08 (m, 6H).

(si) (S)~(2~(((tert-butyldimethylsilyl)oxy)methyl)~4-methyl-2,3-dihy methoxy-2-nitro-4-( (triisopropylsilyl)oxy)phenyl)methanone (16)

Triphenylarsine ( 1 .7 1 g, 5.60 mmol, 0.4 eq) was added to a mixture of inflate 15 ( 10.00 g , 14 mmol, eq), methyiboronic acid (2.94 g, 49. 1 mmol, 3.5 eq), silver oxide ( 13 g, 56 mmol. 4 eq) and potassium phosphate tribasic (1 .8 g, 84 mmol, 6 eq) in dry dioxane (80 mL) under an argon atmosphere. The reaction was flushed with argon 3 times and bis(benzonitrile)palladium(l l) chloride (540 mg, 1.40 mmol, 0.1 eq) was added. The reaction was flushed with argon 3 more times before being warmed instantaneously to 1 0°C. After 10 minutes the reaction was cooled to room temperature and filtered through a pad ceiite. The solvent was removed by rotary evaporation under reduced pressure. The resulting residue was subjected to column flash chromatography (silica gel; 10 % ethyl acetate / hexane). Pure fractions were collected and combined, and excess eluent was removed by rotary evaporation under reduced pressure afforded the product 6 (4.5 g, 55 % ). LC/MS, method B, 4.27 min (ES+) / (relative intensity) 579. 18 ([Af + H] 100); H NMR (400 MHz, δ CDCI3) 7.70 (s, 1H), 6.77 (s, 1H), 5.51 (d, J = .7 Hz, H), 4.77 - 4.59 (m, H), 3.89 (s, 3H), 2.92 - 2.65 (m, 1H), 2.55 (d, J = 14.8 Hz, 1H), 1.62 (d, J = 1.1 Hz, 3H), 1.40 - 1.18 ( ,

3H), 1.1 1 (s, 9H), 1.1 0 (s, 9H), 0.90 (s, 9H), 0.11 (d, J = 2.3 Hz, 6H ).

(Hi) (S)-(2-amino-5-methoxy-4-((triisopropyisilyl)oxy)phenyi)(2-(((te^ butyldimethylsi!yi)oxy)methyl)-4-methyl-2,3

CDCI3) 7.28 (s, 1H), 6.67 (s, 1H), 6.19 (s, 1H), 4.64 - 4.53 ( , J = 4.1 Hz, 1H), 4.17 (s, 1H), 3.87 (s, 1H), 3.77 - 3.69 (m, H), 3.66 (s, 3H), 2.71 - 2.60 (m, H), 2.53 - 2.43 (m, 1H),

2.04 - 1.97 (m, J = 11.9 Hz, 1H), 1.62 (s, 3H), 1.26 - 1.13 (m, 3H), 1.08 - 0.99 (m, 18H), 0.82 (s, 9H), 0.03 - -0.03 (m, J = 6.2 Hz, 6H).

(b) (11 S, 11aS)-tert-butyl 11-((tert-butyldimethylsilyl)oxy)-8-hydmxy-7-methoxy-2-methyl-5- oxo-1 1 11a-dihydro-1H-benzo[e]pyrrolo[1 ,2-a][1,4]diazepine~1 0(5H)-carboxylate (22)

(i) (S)-tert-buty! (2-(2-(((tert-butyldimethylsilyl)oxy)methyl)-4-methyl-2,3-dihydro-1H- pyrrole-1-carbonyi)-4-methoxy-5-((triisopropylsilyl)oxy)phenyi)carbamate (18) Di-terf-buty! dicarbonate (2.8 g, 12.90 mmol, 1.2 eq) was melted with amine 17 (5.9 g, 10.75 mmol) at 00 C. After 10 minutes, full conversion was observed and the residue was subjected to flash column chromatography (silica gel; 5 % ethyl acetate in hexane). The pure fractions were collected and combined and excess solvent was removed by rotary evaporation under reduced pressure to afford the product 8 (6 g , 86 %). H NMR (400 MHz,

CDCI 3) 8.22 (s, 1H), 7.72 (s, 1H), 6.72 (s, 1H), 6.15 (s, 1H), 4.63 (s, 1H), 3.91 (s, 1H), 3.79 (s, 1H), 3.73 s, 3H), 2.71 (dd, J = 16.1, 10.2 Hz, 1H), 2.60 2.46 (m, 1H), 1.64 (s, 3H), 1.46 (s, 9H), 1.33 - 1.15 (m, 3H), 1.10 (s, 9H), 1.08 (s, 9H), 0.87 (s, 9H), 0.02 (s, 6H).

(si) (S)-tert-butyl (2-(2-(hydroxymethyiy4-methyl~2>3^shydro-1H~pyrrole-1-carbonyiy4~ methoxy-5-((tnisopropylsiiyl)oxy)phenyl)carbamate (19) 18 (9.87 g, 15.2 mmol) was dissolved in a 7:1:1 :2 mixture of acetic acid/methanol/tetrahydrofuran/water (168:24:24:48 mL) and allowed to stir at room temperature. After 1 hour, complete conversion was observed. Solvent was removed by rotary evaporation under reduced pressure. The residue was diluted with ethyl acetate and washed sequentially with water (2 x 500 mL), saturated aqueous sodium bicarbonate (200 mL) and brine. The organic phase was dried over magnesium sulphate, filtered and excess ethyl acetate removed by rotary evaporation under reduced pressure to afford the desired product 19 (7.91 g, 97 %). LC/MS, Method C, 2.13 min (ES+) /z (relative intensity) 1092.45 + δ [[2M +Na] ; H NMR (400 MHz, CDCI3) 7.93 (s, 1H), 7.60 (s, 1H), 6 74 (s, 1H), 6.1 1 (s, 1H), 4.69 (br, 1H), 4.55 (br, 1H), 3.84 - 3.76 (m, 2H), 3.74 (s, 3H). 2.84 (dd, = 16.6, 10.3 Hz, 1H), 2.19 (dd. J = 16.4, 4.0 Hz, 1H), 1.67 (s, 3H), 1.46 (s, 9H), 1.32 - 1.19 (m, 3H), 1.09 (s, 9H), 1.08 (s, 9H).

(Hi) (118,1 1aSytert-butyl 11-hydroxy-7-methoxy-2-methyl-5-oxo-8-((triisopropylsi!yl)oxy)-

11, 11a-dfoydro-1H-benzo[e]pyrroio[1,2-a][1,4jdiazepine-10(5Hycarboxy1ate (20) Dimethyl su!pboxide (2.3 mL, 32.2 mmol, 2.5 eq) was added dropwise to a solution of oxalyi chloride ( 1 .3 mL, 15.5 mmoi, 1.2 eq) in dry dichioromethane (70 mL) at -78°C (dry ice /acetone bath) under an atmosphere of argon. After 10 minutes, a soiution of 19 (6.9 g, 12.9 mmol) in dry dichioromethane (50 mL) was added slowly with the temperature still at -78°C. After 15 minutes, triethylamine (9 mL, dried over 4A molecular sieves, 64.5 mmo , 5 eq) was added dropwise and the dry ice/acetone bath was removed. The reaction mixture was allowed to reach room temperature and was extracted with cold hydrochloric acid (0.1 M), saturated aqueous sodium bicarbonate and brine. The organic phase was dried over magnesium sulphate, filtered and excess dichioromethane was removed by rotary evaporation under reduced pressure to afford product 20 (4.36 g, 63%). LC/MS, Method C, + δ 2 0 1 min (ES+) m/z (relative intensity) 1087.45 {[2M + Naj ); Ή NMR (400 MHz, CDCI3) 7.17 (s, 1H), 6.70 (d, 1H), 6.65 (s, 1H), 5.74 - 5.61 (m, 1H), 4.03 (s, 1H), 3.82 (s, 3H), 3.75 (td, J = 9.9, 3.3 Hz, 1H), 2.94 (dd. J 17.1, 10.2 Hz, 1H), 2.57 (d, = 18.5 Hz, 1H), 1.75 (d, J = 7.5 Hz, 3H), 1.37 (s, 9H), 1.30 - 1.19 (m, 3H), 1.08 (s, 9H), 1.06 (s, 9H). (iv) ( 11S, 11aS)-tert-butyl 11~((iert-butyidimethyisilyi)oxy)~7~meihoxy-2-methyi-5-oxo-8-

((triisopropylsilyl)oxy)- 11, 11a-dihydro- 1H-benzo[e]pyrroio[ 1, 2-a][ 1, 4]diazepine- 10(5H)~ carboxylate (21) Tert-butyldimethyisiiyitriflate (6.5 ml , 28 39 mmol, 3 eq) was added to a solution of compound 20 (5.04 g , 9.46 mmol) and 2,6-lutidine (4.4 mL, 37.86 mmol, 4 eq) in dry dichloromethane (60 mL) at 0°C under argon. After 1 minutes, the cold bath was removed and the reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 1 hour. The reaction mixture was extracted with water, saturated aqueous sodium bicarbonate and brine. The organic phase was dried over magnesium sulphate, filtered and excess was removed by rotary evaporation under reduced pressure to give the product 2 1 (5. 18 g, 85 %). H N R (400 δ MHz, CDCI3) 7.1 (s, 1H), 6.67 (s, 1H), 6.63 (s, H), 5.79 (d, J = 8.9 Hz, H), 3.84 (s, 3H), 3.65 ( d, J 9.9, 3.8 Hz, 1H), 2.89 (dd, J 16.9, 10.3 Hz, 1H), 2.35 (d, J 16.7 Hz, 1H),

1.75 (s, 3H), 1.31 (s, 9H), 1.28 1 18 (m, 3H), 109 (s, 9H), 108 (s, 9H), 0.85 (s, 9H), 0.25 (s, 3H), 0.18 (s, 3H).

(v) (11S, 11aS)-teri-butyl 11-((tert-butyldimethylsilyl)oxy)-8-hydroxy-7-methoxy-2-methyl-5- oxo-1 1, 11a-dihydro- 1H-benzo[e]pyrrolo[1 ,2-a][1,4]diazepine~1 0(5H)-carboxylate (22) Lithium acetate (800 mg, 7.73 mmol) was added to a solution of compound 2 1 (5 g , 7.73 mmol) in wet dimethyiformamide (50 mL, 50: 1 DMF/water). After 2 hours, the reaction was complete and the reaction mixture was diluted with ethyl acetate (250 mL) and washed with aqueous citric acid solution (pH ~ 3), water and brine. The organic layer was dried over magnesium sulphate, filtered and excess ethyl acetate was removed by rotary evaporation under reduced pressure. The resulting residue was subjected to flash column chromatography (silica gel; gradient, 25% to 50% ethyl acetate in hexane). Pure fractions were collected, combined and excess eiuent was removed by rotary evaporation under reduced pressure to give the product 22 (3.1 4 g, 83%). LC/ S, Method C, ( 1 .92 min (ES+) + δ m/z (relative intensity) 49 1.25 ([M+H] ). H NMR (400 MHz, CDCI3) 7.20 (s, 1H), 6.68 (s, 2H), 6.08 (s, 1H), 5.8 1 (d, J 8.9 Hz, 1H), 3.91 (s, 3H), 3.71 (td, J 9.8, 3.8 Hz, H), 2.89

(dd, J = 16.9, 10.3 Hz, 1H), 2.36 (d, J = 16.9 Hz, 1H), 1.75 (s, 3H), 1.31 (s, 9H), 0.85 (s, 9H), 0.23 (s, 3H), 0.21 (s, 3H).

(c) ( 1 1S, 11aS, 11'S, 11a'S)-cli-tert-butyl 8,8'-(((5-(1-amino-15-oxo-3, 6, 9, 12-tetraoxa-16- azanonadec- 18-yn- 19-yl)- 1, 3~phenyiene)bis(methylene) )bis(oxy))bss(1 1-hydroxy- 7- e oxy-

2-methyl-5-oxo- 11, 11a~dihydro-1H~benzo[e]pyrro!o[ 1, 2~a][1, 4]diazepine- 10(5H)-carboxyiate) (25) (i) ( 11S, 11aS, 11'S, 11a'S)-di-tert-butyl 8, 8'-{{(5-iodo- 1, 3- phenylene)bis(methylene))his(oxy))bis(1 1-((tert-butyldimethyisH

5-OXO- 11, 11a-dihydro-1 H-benzo[e]pyrrob[1 ,2-a][1 ,4]diazepine-10(5H)-carboxylate) (23) 1,3-bis(bromomeihy!)-5-iodobenzene (400 mg, 1.02 mmoi) was added to a stirred solution of

22 ( 1 g, 2.04 mmol, 2 eq), TBA (38 mg, 0.102 mmoi, 0.1 eq) and K2C0 3 (282 mg, 2.04 mmoi. 2 eq) in dry DMF (10 ml). The reaction mixture was heated to 60°C and stirred under an argon atmosphere for 2 hours at which point analysis by TLC showed full conversion. The reaction mixture was allowed to cooi to room temperature and the DMF was removed by rotary evaporation under reduced pressure. The resulting residue was diluted in EtOAc and washed with water, brine. The organic layer was dried over magnesium sulphate, filtered and excess ethyl acetate was removed by rotary evaporation under reduced pressure. The resulting residue was subjected to flash column chromatography (silica gel; gradient, 50% to 80% ethyl acetate in hexane). Pure fractions were collected and combined and excess eluent was removed by rotary evaporation under reduced pressure to give the product 22

( 1 .27 g, quant.). LC/ S, Method C, (2.38 min (ES+) m/z (relative intensity) 1232.35. + δ ([M+Na] ), H MR (400 MHz, CDCI3) 7.75 (s, 2H), 7.50 (s, 1H), 7.24 (s, 2H), 6.67 (s, 2H), 6.51 (s, 2H), 5.78 (d, J = 8.8 Hz, 2H), 5.03 (dd, J = 34.2, 12.8 Hz, 4H), 3.93 (s, 6H), 3.68 (id. J = 9.8, 3.7 Hz, 2H), 2.89 (dd, J = 16.9, 10.3 Hz, 2H), 2.34 (d, J = 17.0 Hz, 2H), 1.75 s, 6H), 1.22 (d, J = 8.5 Hz, 16H), 0.84 (s, 18H), 0.22 (s, 6H), 0.16 (s, 6H). (ii) ( 11S, 11aS, 11'S, 1 a'S)-di-tert-butyl 8,8'-(((5-(2,2-dimethyl-4, 20-dioxo-3,8, 11, 14, 17- pentaoxa-5, 21-diazatetracos-23-yn-24-yl)-1 ,3-pheny!ene )bis(methyiene))bis(oxy))bis(1 1-

((tert-butyldimethyisilyl)oxy)-7-methoxy-2-methyl-5-oxo-1 1, 11a-dihydro- 1H- benzo[e]pyrrolo[1,2-a][1,4]diazepine-10(5H)-carboxyiate) (24)

A catalytic amount of Pd(PPh 3 )4 (22 8 mg, 9.9 mo , 0.02 eq) was added to a mixture of 23

( 1 2 g, 0.995 mmo!, 1 eq), 3 (400 mg, 0.995 mmol, 1 eq), Cu (7.6 mg, 39.6 µ η ο Ι, 0.04 eq), diethylamine (0.20 L, .99 mmol, 2 eq) and oven-dried 4A molecular sieve pellets n dry

DMF ( 1 ml). The mixture was degased and flushed with argo 3 times then heated in a microwave at 100°C for 0 minutes. DMF was removed by rotary evaporation under reduced pressure. The reaction mixture was diluted in ethyl acetate and washed with water and brine. The organic layer was dried over magnesium sulphate filtered and excess ethyl acetate was removed by rotary evaporation under reduced pressure. The resulting residue was subjected to flash column chromatography (silica gel; 5% methanol in dichloromethane). Pure fractions were collected and combined and excess eluent was removed by rotary evaporation under reduced pressure to give the product 24 ( 1 .1 g, 79%). LC/MS, Method D, (2.43 min (ES+) δ m/z (relative intensity) no ionisation; NMR (400 MHz, CDC 3) 7.49 (s, 1H), 7.47 (s, 2 H), 7.24 (s, 2H), 6.68 (s, 2H), 6 56 (s, 2H), 5.79 (d, J = 8.9 Hz, 2H), 5.04 (dd, J = 28.9, 12.3 Hz,

4H), 4 25 (d, J = 5.4 Hz, 2H), 3.93 (s, 6H), 3.79 - 3.56 (m, 6H), 3.52 (t, J = 5.2 Hz, 2H), 3.29 (d, J = 5.0 Hz, 2H), 2.97 - 2.83 (m, 2H), 2.5 1 (t, J = 5.7 Hz, 2H), 2.35 (d, J = 6.1 Hz, 2H), 1.76 (s, 6H), 1.43 (s, 9H), 1.22 (s, 18H), 0.85 (s, 18H), 0.22 (s, 6H), 0 .17 (s, 6H).

( i) ( 11S, 11aS, 11'S, 11a'S)-di-tert-butyl 8, 8 -(((5-(1-amino- 15-oxo-3, 6,9, 12-tetraoxa-1 6- azanonadec- 18-yn-19-yl)- 1,3-phenylene)bis(methylene))bis(oxy))bis(1 1-hydroxy-7-methoxy-

2-methyl- 5-oxo- 11, 11a-dihydro- 1H-benzo[e]pyrrolo[1 ,2-a][1, 4]diazepine- 10(5H)-carboxylate ) (25) Tert-buty!dimethylsiiyltrif!ate (0.77 L, 3.37 mmol, 10 eq) was added to a solution of compound 24 (500 g, 0.337 mmol) and 2,6-iutidine (0.51 mL, 4.38 mmol, 12 eq) in dry dichloromethane ( 10 ml). The reaction was stirred for 12 hours at ambient temperature. The reaction mixture was washed with saturated aqueous ammonium chloride and brine. The organic phase was dried over magnesium sulphate, filtered and excess solvent was removed by rotary evaporation under reduced pressure to give the TBS carbamate intermediate. The residue was dissolved in tetrahydrofuran ( 10m!_) and a mixture of tetra-n- butylammonium fluoride (1 , 7 mL, .685 mmol, 5 eq) and acetic acid (0 1 mL, 1.685 mmol, 5 eq) was added. The reaction mixture was stirred 3 hours at room temperature; then washed with water, saturated aqueous sodium bicarbonate and brine. The organic phase was dried over magnesium sulphate, filtered and excess solvent was removed by rotary evaporation under reduced pressure to give 25 as crude. LC/MS, Method D, ( 1 .27 min (ES+) m/z (relative intensity) 1155.30. ([M+Hj +)).

(d) N-(3-(3,5-bis((((S)-7-methoxy-2-methyl-5-oxo-5, 11a-dlhydro-1H-benzo[e]pyrrolo[1, 2- a][1 A]diazepin-8-yl)oxy)methyl)phenyl)prop-2-yn-1-yl)-1 -(3-(2,5

(i) ( 11S, 11aS,11'S,1 1a'Sydhiert~hutyl 8,8'-(((5-(1-(2,5-dioxo-2,5-dihydro-1H-pynol-1-yi)-

3, 19-dioxo~7, 10, 13, 16-tetraoxa-4,20-diazatricos~22-yn-23-yl)-1,3- phenylene)bis(methylene))bis(oxy))bis(1 1-hydroxy-7-methoxy-2-methyl-5-oxo- 11, 11a- dihydro-1 H-benzo[e]pyrroio[ 1, 2-a][1, 4]diazepine- 10(5H)-carboxyiate) 26 EDC (65 mg, 0.34 mmo!, 1 eq) was added to a solution of crude 25 (0.34 mmo , 1 eq) and

3-maleimidopropionic acid (57.5 mg, 0.34 mmo!, 1 eq) in dichloromethane (10 m!_). The reaction was stirred at room temperature for 2 hours after which full conversion was observed by LC S. The reaction mixture was diluted in dichloromethane and washed with water and brine. The organic layer was dried over magnesium sulphate filtered and excess dichloromethane was removed by rotary evaporation under reduced pressure to give compound 26 as crude. LC/MS, Method D, ( 1 .49 min (ES+) /z (relative intensity) no ionisation). (si) N-(3-(3,5-bis((((S)-7-methoxy-2-methyl-5-oxo-5, 11a-dihydro- 1H-benzo[e]pyrrolo[1 ,2- a][ 1, 4]diazepin-8-yl)oxy)methyl)phenyl)prop-2-yn- 1-yi)-1-(3-(2, 5-dioxo-2,5-dihydro-1H-pyrrol-

1-yl)propanamido)-3, 6,9, 12~teiraoxaperstadecan-15-amide 27

Trifluoroacetic acid (9.5 mL) was added to a mixture of crude 26 (0.337 mmoi) in water (0.5 mL) at 0°C. The reaction was stirred 2 hours at 0°C. Then the reaction mixture was added dropwise in cold saturated aqueous sodium bicarbonate. The reaction mixture was extracted with dich!oromethane. The organic layer was then washed with brine, dried over magnesium sulphate filtered and excess dichloromethane was removed by rotary evaporation under reduced pressure. The resulting residue was subjected to flash column chromatography (silica gel; gradient; 2 to 5% methanol n dichloromethane). Pure fractions were coilected and combined and excess eiuent was removed by rotary evaporation under reduced pressure to give the product 27 (70.4 mg, 20%). LG/ S, Method E, (4.96 min (ES+) m/z + δ (relative intensity) 1070.25. ([M+H] ); H N R (400 MHz, CDC 3) 7.78 (d, J = 4.0 Hz, 2H), 7.52 (s, 2H), 7.44 (s, 2H), 7.40 (s, 1H), 7.02 - 6.93 (m, 1H), 6.88 (s, H), 6.77 (s, 2H), 6.74

(s, 2H), 6.65 (s, 2 H), 5.22 - 5.01 (m, 4H), 4.3 1 4 .15 (m, 4H), 3.94 (s, 6H), 3.89 - 3.72 (m, 4H), 3.65 3.54 (m, 10H), 3.54 - 3.45 (m, 4H), 3.43 3.34 (m, 2H), 3.25 3.12 (m, 2H), 2.94 (dd, J = 27.0, 0.2 Hz, 2H), 2.51 (dd, J = 3.6, 6.7 Hz, 4H), .83 (s, 6H). (e) N-(3-(3, 5~bis({((S)-7-methoxy-2-methyl-5-oxo-5, 1la-dihydro- 1H-benzo[e]pyrrolo[ 1, 2- a][1, 4]diazepin-8-yl)oxy)methyl)phenyl)prop-2-yn- 1-yi)- 1-(2-iodoacetamido)-3, 6,9, 12- tetraoxapentadecan-15-amide 29 [SG3378]

(i) ( 11S, 11aS, 11'S, 11a'S)-di-tert-butyl 8, B'-(((5-(1-iodo-2, 18-dioxo~6, 9, 12, 15-fefraoxa~3, 19- diazadocos-21-yn-22-yl}- 1, 3^henylene)bis(methylene))bis(oxy))bis( 11-hydroxy-7-methoxy- 2-methy!~5~oxo-1 1, 11'a-dihydro-1'H-benzo[e]pyrrolo[1 ,2-a][1,4]diazepine-1 0(5H)~carboxyiate) 28 iodoacetic anhydride (53 mg, 0 150 mmo!, 1 eq) was added to a solution of crude 25 (0. 150 mmol, 1 eq) in dichloromeihane (5 mL). The reaction was stirred at room temperature for 20 minutes after which full conversion was observed by LCMS. The reaction mixture was diluted in dichloromethane and washed with water. The organic layer was dried over magnesium sulphate filtered and excess dichloromethane was removed by rotary evaporation under reduced pressure to give compound 28 as crude. LC/ S, Method D,

( 1 .50 in (ES+) irs/z (relative intensity) no ionisation). (si) N-(3~(3,5-bis((((S)~7~methoxy-2-methyl-5-oxo-5, 11a~dihydro-1H-henzo[e]pyrm a][1, 4]diazepin-8-yl)oxy)methyl)phenyl)prop-2-yn- 1- / - 1-(2-iodoacetamido)-3, 6,9, 12- tetraoxapentadecan- 15-amide 29

Trifluoroacetic acid (0.45 mL) was added to a mixture of crude 28 (0.337 mmol) in water (0.05 L) at 0°C. The reaction was stirred 30 minutes at 0°C. Then the reaction mixture was added dropwise in coid saturated aqueous sodium bicarbonate. The reaction mixture was extracted with dich!oromethane. The organic layer was then washed with brine, dried over magnesium sulphate filtered and excess dichloromethane was removed by rotary evaporation under reduced pressure. The resulting residue was subjected to flash column chromatography (silica gel; gradient; 2 to 5% methanol in dichloromethane). Pure fractions were collected and combined and excess eiuent was removed by rotary evaporation under reduced pressure to give the product 29 (4.23 mg, 5%). LC/MS, Method D, (1.35 min (ES+) + δ m/z (relative intensity) 1087.20 ([M+H] ); H NMR (400 H2, CDCI3) 7.79 (d, J = 4.0 Hz, 2H), 7.53 (s, 2H), 7.45 (s, 3H), 7.07 (br, 1H), 6.94 (br, 1H), 6.78 (s, 2H), 6.73 (s, 2H), 5.15 (q, J = 12.6 Hz, 4H), 4.32 4.19 (m, 4H), 3.96 (s, 6H), 3.76 (dd, J = 12.0, 6.4 Hz, 2H), 3.69 (s, 2H), 3.64 (d, J = 3.6 Hz, 8H), 3.60 (s, 4H), 3.55 3.49 (m, 2H), 3.42 (dd, J = 10.3, 5.2 Hz, 2H), 3.23 3.1 1 (m, 2H), 3.00 - 2.89 (m, 2H), 2.53 (t, J = 5.7 Hz, 2H), 1.83 (s, 6H). Example 5

(a) ( 11S, 11aS, 11'S, 11a 'S)-di-tert-butyl 8,8'-(((5-(1-(20~amino~3, 6, 9, 12, 15, 18- hexaoxaicosyl)-1H-1, 2,3-triazol-4-yl)-1,3^henylene)bis(methyiene butyidimethyisiiyi)oxy)-7-methoxy-2-methyi-5-oxo- 11, 11a-dihydro- 1H-benzo[e]pyrrolo[ 1, 2- a][ 1,4]diazepine-10 5H -carbox late 32

(i) ( 11S, 11aS, 11'S, 11a'S)-di-tert-butyl 8, B'-(((5-((trimethylsilyl)ethynyl)-1,3- phenylene)bis(methylene))bis(oxy))bis(1 1-((tert-butyldimethylsily^ 5-ΟΧΟ- 11,11a-dihydro-1 H-benzo[e]pyrroio[1 ,2-a][1,4]diazepine-10(5H)-carboxylate) 30

A catalytic amount of Pd(PPh 3) ( 1 mg, 0.0 1 mmol, 0.02 eq) was added to a mixture of 23 (600 mg, 0.496 mmol), TMS-acetylene (0.21 mL, 1.488 mmo , 3 eq ), Cul (4.0 mg, 0.Q2 mmol, 0.04 eq), diethyiamine (0. 1 mL, 0.992 mol, 2 eq) and oven-dried 4A molecular sieve pellets in dry DMF (4 mL). The mixture was degased and flushed with argon 3 times then heated in a microwave at 100°C for 10 minutes. DMF was removed by rotary evaporation under reduced pressure. The reaction mixture was diluted in ethyl acetate and washed with water and brine. The organic layer was dried over magnesium sulphate filtered and excess ethyl acetate was removed by rotary evaporation under reduced pressure. The resulting residue was subjected to flash column chromatography (silica gel; 50% ethyl acetate in hexane). Pure fractions were collected and combined and excess eluent was removed by rotary evaporation under reduced pressure to give the product 30 (530 mg, 91%). LC/ S, δ Method C, (2 45 min (ES+); no ionisation); H NMR (400 MHz, CDCI3) 7.52 (s, 1H), 7.49 (s, 2H), 7.23 (s, 2H), 6.67 (s, 2H), 6.54 (s, 2H), 5.78 (d, J = 8.8 Hz, 2H), 5.06 (dd, J = 4 1.6, 12.8 Hz, 4H), 3.93 (s, 6H), 3.68 (id, J = 9.8, 3.7 Hz, 2H), 2.90 (dd, J = 17.0, 10.4 Hz, 2H), 2.35 (d, J = 17.0 Hz, 2H), 1.76 (s, 6H), 1.20 (s, 18H), 0.84 (s, 18H), 0.22 (s, 15H), 0.17 (s, 6H).

(ii) (11 S, 11aS, 11'S, 11a'S)-di-teri-buty! 8,8 '-(((5-ethynyl-1 ,3- phenylene)bis(methylene))bis(oxy))bis(11-((tert-butyldimethyisilyl)^ 5-OXO-11, 11a-dihydro-1H-benzo[e]pyrrolo[1,2-a][1,4]diazepine-10(5H)-carboxylate) 3 1

Solid K2C0 3 (124 mg, 0.90 mmol, 2 eq) was added to a stirred solution of the TMS-protected compound 30 (530 mg, 0.449 mmol) in eOH (10 mL). After 1 hour stirring at room temperature the reaction was complete. Methanol was removed by rotary evaporation under reduced pressure. The reaction mixture was diluted in dichloromethane and washed with water and brine. The organic layer was dried over magnesium sulphate filtered and excess dichloromethane was removed by rotary evaporation under reduced pressure to give the product 3 1 (477 mg, 95%). LC/MS, Method C, (2.32 min (ES+); no ionisation); H NMR (400 δ MHz, CDCI 3) 7.53 (s, 3H), 7.24 (s, 2H), 6.88 (s, 2H), 6.54 (s, 2H), 5.79 (d, J = 8.7 Hz, 2H), 5.07 (dd, J = 33.2, 12.8 Hz, 4H), 3.93 (s, 6H), 3.69 (id, J = 9.7, 3.6 Hz, 2H), 3.08 (s, 1H), 2.90 (dd, J = 16.9, 10.3 Hz, 2H), 2.35 (d, J = 16.8 Hz, 2H), 1.76 (s, 6H), 1.25 - 1.13 (m, 18H), 0.85 (s, 18H), 0.22 (s, 6H), 0.16 (m, 6H).

(Hi) ( 11S, 11aS, 11'S, 11a'S)-di-tert-butyl 8,8'-(((5-(1 -(20-amino-3 ,6,9, 12,15, 18-bexaoxai ∞ syl)- 1H-1,2,3Anazol-4-yi)-1,3-phenyiene)bis(methylene))bis(oxy})bis(11-((ted- butyldimethylsilyl)oxy)-7~methoxy-2-methyl-5-oxo- 11,1 1a-dihydro- 1H-benzo[e]pyrrolo[ 1, - a][1,4]diazepine-10(5H)-carboxylate) 32

Solid CuS0 .5H20 (5 mg, 0.021 mmol, 0.05 eq) and (+)-sodium L-ascorbate (17.0 mg, 0.086 mmol, 0.2 eq) were added to a stirred solution of 20-azido-3,6,9,12,15,18-hexaoxaicosan-1- amine (151 mg, 0.43 mmol, 1 eq) and the a kyne 3 1 (477 mg, 0.43 mmol 1 eq) in -BuOH

(5 mL) and H20 (5 mL) at room temperature. The mixture was degased and flushed with argon. After stirring for 2 hours, the reaction was complete. The reaction mixture was diluted in ethyl acetate and washed with water and brine. The organic layer was dried over magnesium sulphate filtered and excess ethyl acetate was rernoved by rotary evaporation under reduced pressure to give the product 32 (640 mg, quant). LC/MS, Method C, ( 1 .67 δ min (ES+) /z (relative intensity) 1457.35 ([M+Hf)); H NMR (400 MHz, CDCI3) 8.10 (s, 1H), 7.93 (br, 3H), 7.54 (s. 1H), 7.25 (s, 2H), 6.68 (s, 2H), 6.62 (s, 2H) 5.79 (d, J = 8.6 Hz, 2H), 5.14 (dd, J = 30.6, 11.8 Hz, 4H), 4.68 4.59 (m, 2H), 4.00 3.94 (m, 2H), 3.94 (s, 6H), 3.75 - 3.47 (m, 24H), 2.91 (dd, = 16.9, 10.3 Hz, 2H), 2 35 (d, J = 16.7 Hz, 2H), 1.76 (s,

6H), 1.31 - 1. 1 1 (m, 18H), 0.85 (d, J ~ 8.1 Hz, 18H), 0.20 (s, 6H), 0.16 (s, 6H).

(b) N-{20-{ 4-(3,5-bis({ {(S)-7-methoxy-2-methyl-5-oxo-5, 11a-dihydro-1H-benzo[e]pyrrolo[ 1,2- a][1,4]diazepin-8-yl)oxy)methyl)phenyl)-1 H-1 ,2,3-triazol-1-yi)-3,6,9, 12, 15, 18-hexaoxaicosyi)- -(2,5-dioxo-2, 5-dihydro- 1H-pyrrol- 1-yl)propanamide (34) [SG3387]

(i) (11S,1 laS, 11'S, 11a'S)-di-tert-butyl 8, 8'~(((5-(1-(24~(2;5-dioxo-2,5~dihydro~1H~pyrro!-1-yi)-

22-0X0-3, 6, 9, 12,15, 18~hexaoxa-21~azaietracosyl)-1H- 1, 2,3-triazol-4-yl)-1,3- phenylene)bis(methylene))bis(oxy))bis( 11-((tert-butyldimethylsilyl)oxy)-7-methoxy-2-methyl-

5-OXO-11, 11a-dihydro-1H-benzo[e]pyrrolo[1,2-aJ[1,4]diazepine-10(5H)-carboxylate) 33 EDCI (40 mg, 0.21 mmol. 1 eq) was added to a solution of 32 (300 mg, 0.206 rnmoL 1 eq) and 3-maieimidopropionic acid (35 mg, 0.21 mmol, 1 eq) in dichloromethane (10 mL). The reaction was stirred at room temperature for 2 hours after which full conversion was observed by LCMS. The reaction mixture was diluted in dichioromethane and washed with water and brine. The organic layer was dried over magnesium sulphate filtered and excess dichioromethane was removed by rotary evaporation under reduced pressure to give compound 33 as crude (320 mg, quant), LC/ S, Method C, (2 3 in (ES+) m/∑(relative intensity) 1609.55([ Μ+Η ).

(si) N-(20-(4-(3, 5-bis(( ((S)-7-methoxy-2-methyl-5-oxo-5, 11a-dihydro- 1H-benzole]pyrroio{1 ,2- a 1 4 diaz ~8~y )o y)m hyl) e yi)-1H-1,2, - azoi-1~yl)~3,6,9, 12,15,18-hexaoxaicosyl)- 3-(2, 5-dioxo-2, 5-dihydro- IH-pyrrol- 1-ytypropanamide 34

Trif!uoroacetic acid (19 mL) was added to a mixture of crude 33 (0.186 mmoi) in water ( 1 mL) at 0°C. The reaction was stirred 30 minutes at 0°C. Then the reaction mixture was added dropwise in cold saturated aqueous sodium bicarbonate (~ 2L). The reaction mixture was extracted with dichioromethane (~ L). The organic layer was then washed with brine, dried over magnesium sulphate, filtered and excess dichioromethane was removed by rotary evaporation under reduced pressure. The resulting residue was subjected to flash column chromatography (silica gel; gradient; 2 to 10% methanol in dichioromethane). Pure fractions were collected and combined and excess eluent was removed by rotary evaporation under reduced pressure to give the product 34 (56 mg, 26%). LC/ S, Method E, (4.99 min (ES+) + δ m/z (relative intensity) 1144.35 ([M+H] ); H N R (400 MHz, CDCi3) 8.01 (s, 1H), 7.86 (s, 2H), 7.75 (d, J = 3.9 Hz, 2H), 7.50 (s, 2H), 7.48 (s, 1H), 6.81 (s, 2H), 6.71 (s, 2H), 6.65 (s, 2H), 6.39 (br, 1H), 5.21 (q, J = 12.4 Hz, 4H), 4.58 (t, J = 4.8 Hz, 2H), 4.25 4.17 (m, 2H), 3.96 - 3.87 (m, 8H), 3.85 - 3.77 (m, 2H), 3.65 - 3.43 (m, 22H), 3.37 (dd, J = 9.9, 4.8 Hz,

2H), 3.20 - 3.08 (m, 2H), 2 92 (dd, J = 16.9, 4.6 Hz, 2H), 2 49 (t, J = 7.2 Hz, 2H), 8 1 (s, 6H). (c) N~(20~(4~(3, 5~his{({(8)- 7-methoxy-2-methyl-5-oxo-5, 1la-dihydro 1H-benzo[e]pyrrolo[1 ,2- a][1,4]diazepin-8-yl)oxy)methyl)phenyl)-1 H-1,2,3-triazol-1-yi)-3,6,9, 12,15,18-hexaoxaicosyl)- 2-iodoacetamide 36 [SG3389]

(i) (11S,1 laS, 11 11 !S)-di-tert-butyl 8, B'-(((5-(1-(1-iodo-2-oxo-6,9, 12, 15, 18,21-hexaoxa-3- azatricosan-23-yl)-1H-1,2,3-triazol-4-yl)-1,3^henylene)bis(methy1ene 1-((tert- butyldimethylsiiyl)oxy)-7-methoxy-2-methyl-5-oxo-1 1, 11a-dihydro-1 H-benzo[e]pyrroio[1 ,2- a][1,4Jdiazepine- 10(5H)-carboxyia te)35 iodoacetic anhydride (37 mg, 0 103 mmoi, 1 eq) was added to a solution of 32 (150 mg, 0.103 mmoi, 1 eq) in dichloromethane (5 mL). The reaction was stirred at room temperature for 20 minutes after which fui! conversion was observed by LCMS. The reaction mixture was diluted in dichloromethane and washed with water. The organic iayerwas dried over magnesium sulphate filtered and excess dichloromethane was removed by rotary evaporation under reduced pressure to give compound 35 as crude.

LC/ S, Method C, (2.17 in (ES+) /z (relative intensity) 1625.35 ([M+H]+). (si) N-(20-(4-( 3,5-bis( (((S)-7-methoxy-2-methyl-5-oxo-5, 11a-dihydro- 1H~benzo[e]pyrroio[ 1, 2- a][1,4]diazepin-8-yl)oxy)methyl)phenyl)-1 H-1,2,3-tnazol-1-yi)-3,6,9, 12,15,18-hexaoxaicosyl)- 2-iodoacetamide 36 Trifluoroacetic acid (4.95 mL) was added to a mixture of crude 35 (0.1 03 mmol) in water (0.05 mL) at 0°C. The reaction was stirred 30 minutes at 0°C. Then the reaction mixture was added dropwise in coid saturated aqueous sodium bicarbonate (200 mL). The reaction mixture was extracted with dichloromethane. The organic layer was then washed with brine, dried over magnesium sulphate, filtered and excess dichloromethane was removed by rotary evaporation under reduced pressure. The resulting residue was subjected to flash column chromatography (silica gel; gradient; 2 to 10% methanol in dichloromethane). Pure fractions were collected and combined and excess eluent was removed by rotary evaporation under reduced pressure to give the product 36 (32 mg, 27%). LC/MS, Method E, (5.16 in (ES+) + δ m z (relative intensity) 1161 .10 ([M+H] ); H N R (400 MHz, CDC 3) 8.03 (s, H), 7.87 (s, 2H), 7.76 (d, J = 3.9 Hz, 2H), 7 5 1 (s, 2H), 7.48 (s, 1H), 6.95 (br, 1H), 6.82 (s, 2H), 6.72 (s, 2H), 5.21 (q, J = 12.4 Hz, 4H), 4.59 - 4.58 (m, 2H), 4.24 - 4.20 (m, 2H), 3.96 - 3.87 ( , 8H), 3.70 (s, 2H), 3.66 · 3.47 (m, 22H), 3.41 (dd, J = 10.3, 5.2 Hz, 2H), 3.19 3.07 (m, 2H), 2.98 2.85 (m, 2H), .78 (d, J = 22.4 Hz, 6H).

Example 6 N-(20-(4-(3,5-bis((((S)-7-methoxy-2-methyl-5-oxo-5, 11a-dihydro-1 H-ben a][1,4]diazepin-8-yl)oxy)methyl)phenyl)-1 H-1,2,3-triazol~1~yl)~3, 6.9, 12, 15, 18- hexaoxaicosyl)pent-4-ynamide (38) (i) (11S, 11aS,11 'S, 11a'S)-di-tert-butyl 8, 8'-(((5-(1-(22-oxo-3, 6, 9, 12, 15, 18~hexaoxa-21- azahexacos-25-yn- 1-yi)~ 1H- 1,2,3-triazol-4-yl)- 1, 3-phenylene)bis(methylene))his(oxy))his(1 1-

((tert-butyldimethyisily!)oxy)-7-methoxy-2-methyl-5-oxo-1 1. 11a-dihydro-1H- benzo[e]pyrrolo[1 ,2-a][1,4]diazepine - O 5H)-carboxyiate } 37 EDC (20 mg, 0.103 mmol, 1 eq) was added o a solution of 32 (150 mg, 0.103 mmol, 1 eq) and pent-4-ynoic acid (20 mg, 0.103 mmol, 1 eq) in dichioromethane (5 mL). The reaction was stirred at room temperature for 12 hours after which full conversion was observed by LCMS. The reaction mixture was diluted in dichioromethane and washed with water and brine. The organic iayer was dried over magnesium sulphate filtered and excess dichioromethane was removed by rotary evaporation under reduced pressure to give compound 37 as crude. LC/MS, method C, (2.16 min (ES+) m/z (relative intensity) no ionisation ).

(ii) N-(20-(4-(3, 5-bis((((S)~ 7-methoxy-2-methyl-5-oxo-5, 11a-dihydro-1 H-benzo[e]pyrrolo[ 1, 2- a][1,4]diazepin-8-yl)oxy)methyl)phenyl)- 1H-1, 2,3-triazol- 1-yl)-3, 6,9, 12,1 5, 18- hexaoxalcosyl)pent-4-ynamide 38 Trifluoroacetic acid (4.95 mL) was added to a mixture of crude 37 (0.103 mmol) in water (0.05 mL) at 0°C. The reaction was stirred 30 minutes at 0°C. Then the reaction mixture was added dropwise in co d saturated aqueous sodium bicarbonate (200 mL). The reaction mixture was extracted with dichloromethane. The organic layer was then washed with brine, dried over magnesium sulphate, filtered and excess dichloromethane was removed by rotary evaporation under reduced pressure. The resulting residue was subjected to flash column chromatography (silica gel; gradient; 2 to 10% methanol in dichloromethane). Pure fractions were collected and combined and excess eluent was removed by rotary evaporation under reduced pressure to give the product 38 (40 mg, 36%). LC/ S, method E, (5.1 1 min (ES+) δ m/z (relative intensity) 1073.30 ([ H] ); H NMR (400 MHz, CDCi 3) 8.01 (s, 1H), 7.87 (s, 2H), 7.77 (d, J = 3.8 Hz, 2H), 7.52 (s, 2H), 7.49 (s, 1H), 6 82 (s, 2H), 8.72 (s, 2H), 8.42 (s,

1H), 5.22 (q, J = 12.3 Hz, 4H), 4.59 (t, J - 4.8 Hz, 2H), 4.28 - 4.17 ( , 2H), 3.99 - 3.88 ( , 8H), 3.57 (dt, J = 9.5, 8.0 Hz, 22H), 3.50 - 3.39 (m, 2H), 3.20 - 3.07 (m, 2H), 2.93 (dd, J =

16.7, 3.9 Hz, 2H), 2.51 (t, J = 6.1 Hz, 2H), 2.39 (t, J = 7.2 Hz, 2H), 2.01 (dd, J = 11.6, 5.4 Hz, 1H), 1.82 (s, 6H).

Example 7 (i) di-tert-butyl 8,8'-(((5-formyl-1, 3- phenylene)his(methylene))bis(oxy))( 11S, 11aS, 11'S, 11a 'S)-bis(1 1-((tert- butyldimethylsilyl)oxy)-7-methoxy-2-methyl-5-oxo-1 , 1Ί a-dihydro-1 H-henzo[e]pyrroh[1 ,2- a][1,4]diazepine-10( 5H}~carboxyiate) 40 3,5-bis(bromomethy!)benzaIdehyde 39 (30 mg, 0.1 02 mmo!) was added to a stirred solution of 22 ( 100 mg, 0.204 mmol, 2 eq), TBAi (7 mg, 0.02 mmo!, 0.1eq) and K2C0 (28 mg, 0 204 mmol, 2 eq) in dry DMF (2 mL). The reaction mixture was heated to 60 °C and stirred under an argon atmosphere for 4 hours and 12 hours at ambient temperature. The mixture was diluted in EtOAc and washed with water, brine. The organic layer was dried over magnesium sulphate, filtered and excess ethyl acetate was removed by rotary evaporation under reduced pressure. The resulting residue was subjected to flash column chromatography (silica gel; gradient, 50% to 70% ethyl acetate in hexane). Pure fractions were collected and combined and excess eiuent was removed by rotary evaporation under reduced pressure to give the product 40 (90 mg, 79%). LC/MS, method C, (2.27 min (ES+) m/z (relative intensity) + δ 1111.35. ([M+H] ), H NMR (400 MHz, CDCI3) 10.05 (s, 1H), 7.95 (s, 2H), 7.86 (s, 1H), 7.26

(s, 2H), 6.69 (s, 2 Η), 6.58 (s, 2H), 5.80 (d, J = 8.5 Hz, 2H), 5.17 (s, 4H), 3.94 (s, 6H), 3.72 3.68 (m, 2H), 2.91 (dd, J - 16.7, 10.3 Hz, 2H), 2.36 (d, J - 17.4 Hz, 2H), 1.77 (s, 6H), 1.25 (s, 18H), 0.84 (s, 18H), 0.22 (s, 6H), 0.15 (s, 6H).

(ii) (E)-3-(3, 5-bis((((1 1S, 11aS)-10-(tert-butoxycarhonyl)- 11-((tert methoxy-2-methy!-5-oxo-5, 10, 11, 11a-tetrahydro- 1H-benzo[e]pyrrolo[1, 2-a][1,4]diazepin-8- yl)oxy)methyl)phenyl)acrylic acid 4 1

Maionic acid ( 14 mg, 0.138 mmol, 2.2 eq) and compound 40 were dissolved in a mixture of piperidine ( 1 L and pyridine (0.1 mL). The reaction mixture was heated to 95 °C and stirred under an argon atmosphere for 2 hours. The mixture was diluted in EtOAc and washed with water, brine. The organic layer was dried over magnesium sulphate, filtered and excess ethyl acetate was removed by rotary evaporation under reduced pressure. The resulting residue was subjected to flash column chromatography (silica gel; gradient 50% to 1 0% ethyl acetate in hexane followed by 2% eOH in EtOAc). Pure fractions were collected and combined and excess eiuent was removed by rotary evaporation under reduced pressure to give the product 4 1 (50 mg, 53%). LC/MS, method C, (2.21 min (ES+) m/z (relative intensity) m r δ 1153.35. ([M+HlVH 4 MHz, CDCI3) 7.73 (d, J = 5.9 Hz, 1H), 7.58 (s, 2H), 7.55 (s, 1H), 7.26 (s, 2 H), 6.68 (s, 2H), 6.54 (s, 2H), 6.46 (d, J = 16.0 Hz, 1H), 5.77 (d, J = 8.6 Hz, 2H), 5.1 (dd, J = 27.4, 12.3 Hz, 4H), 3.94 (s, 6H), 3.68 (dd, J = 8.9, 6.4 Hz, 2H), 2.89 (dd, J = 16.8, 10.3 Hz, 2H), 2.34 (d, J = 16.7 Hz, 2H), 1.75 (s, 6H), 1 29 - 1.09 (m, 8H), 0.82 (s, 18H), 0.21 (s, 6H), 0 .13 (s, 6H). (Hi) di-tert-butyl 8, 8'-(((5-((E)-2,2-dimethyl-4, 15-dioxo-3, 8, 11-trioxa-5, 14-diazaheptadec- 16- en-17-yl)-1,3-phenylene)bis(methylene))bis(oxy))(1 1S, 11aS, 11'S,1 1a'S)-bis(1 1-((tert- butyldimethylsilyl)oxy)-7-methoxy-2-rnethyl-5-oxo- 11,1 1a-dihydro- 1H-benzo[e]pyrrob[ 1, 2- a][1,4]diazepine-10(5H)-carboxylate) 42

EDCI (9 mg, 0.045 mmo!, 1 eq) was added to a solution of 4 1 (50 g, 0.043 m o , 1 eq) and tert-butyi (2-(2-(2-aminoethoxy)ethoxy)ethyl)carbamate ( 1 1 mg, 0.045 mmo!, 1 eq) n dichioromethane (2 mL). The reaction was stirred at room temperature for 1 hour after which full conversion was observed by LCMS. The reaction mixture was diluted in dichioromethane and washed with water and brine. The organic layer was dried over magnesium sulphate filtered and excess dichioromethane was removed by rotary evaporation under reduced pressure to give compound 42 as crude. LC/ S, method C, (2.29 min (ES+) m/z (relative intensity) 1384.35([M+H] +)).

(iv) di-tert-butyl 8,8'-(((5-((E)-3-((2-(2-(2-aminoethoxy)ethoxy)ethyl)amino^ yl)-1,3-phenylene)bis(methylene))bis(oxy))(11S, 11aS, 11'S, 11a'S)-bis(1 1-((tert- butyldimethylsilyl)oxy)-7-methoxy-2-methyi-5-oxo- 11, 11a-dihydro- 1H-benzo[eJpyrrolo[1 ,2- a][1,4]diazepine-10(5H)-carboxylate) 43 Tert-buty!dimethylsilyltrifiate (0.10 mL, 0.43 mrmol, 0 eq) was added to a solution of compound 42 (0.043 mmol) and 2,6-!utidine (0.07 mL, 0.56 mmol, 13 eq) in dry dichioromethane (2 mL). The reaction was stirred for 2 hours at ambient temperature. The reaction mixture was washed with saturated aqueous ammonium chloride, water and brine. The organic phase was dried over magnesium sulphate, filtered and excess solvent was removed by rotary evaporation under reduced pressure to give a mixture of amine 43 and mono TBS-deprotected compound as crude. LC/MS, method C, ( 1 .72 min (ES+) /z (relative intensity) 1283.35 ([M+H] +)).

(v) di-tert-butyl 8,8'-(((5-((E)-1d-(2,5-dioxo-2,5-dihydro-1H-pyrrol-1-yl)-3, 14-dioxo-7, 10-dioxa- 4, 13-diazahexadec-1-en-1-yl)-1, 3- phenylene)bis(methylene))bis(oxy))( 11S, 11aS, 11'S,1 1a 'S)-bis( 11-((tert- butyidsmethyissiyi)oxy)-7-methoxy-2-methyi~5~oxo- 11, 11a-dihydro-1H-benzo[e]pyrrolo[ 1, 2- a][1,4]diazepine-10(5H)-carboxyiate) 44 EDCI (9 mg, 0.045 mmol, 1 eq) was added to a solution of 43 (0.043 mmol, 1 eq) and 3- ma!eimidopropionic acid (8 mg, 0.045 mmol, 1 eq) in dichioromethane (2 mL). The reaction was stirred at room temperature for hours after which full conversion was observed by LCMS. The reaction mixture was diluted in dichioromethane and washed with water and brine. The organic layer was dried over magnesium sulphate filtered and excess dichioromethane was removed by rotary evaporation under reduced pressure to give compound 44 as crude, LC/MS, method C, (2.19 min (ES+) /z (relative intensity)

1435.40([M+H] +).

(vi) (E)~3-{3,5~bis{{{(S)-7~methoxy-2-methyi-5-oxo-5, 11a-dihydro- 1H-benzo[e]pyrrolo[1, 2- a][1,4]diazepin-8-yl)oxy)methyl)phenyl)-N-(2-(2-(2-(3-(2, 5-dioxo-2, 5-dihydro- 1Η-pyrrol· 1- yl)propanamido)ethoxy)ethoxy)ethyl)acrylamide 45 Trifluoroacetic acid (4.95 mL) was added to a mixture of crude 44 (0.043 mmoi) in water (0.05 mL) at 0°C. The reaction was stirred 1 hour at 0°C. Then the reaction mixture was added dropwise in cold saturated aqueous sodium bicarbonate (100 mL). The reaction mixture was extracted with dichioromethane. The organic layer was then washed with brine, dried over magnesium sulphate, filtered and excess dichioromethane was removed by rotary evaporation under reduced pressure. The resulting residue was subjected to preparative HPLC. Pure fractions were collected and combined and excess eluent was removed by lyophilisation to give the product 45 (4.26 mg, 0% ). LC/MS, method C, (1.35 min (ES+) /z (relative intensity) 968.25 ([ +H ).

Example 8 General antibody conjugation procedure Antibodies are diluted to 1-5 mg/mL in a reduction buffer (examples: phosphate buffered saline PBS, histidine buffer, sodium borate buffer,TRIS buffer). A freshly prepared solution of TCEP (tris(2-carboxyethyl)phosphine hydrochloride) is added to selectively reduce cysteine disulfide bridges. The amount of TCEP is proportional to the target level of reduction, within 1 to 4 molar equivalents per antibody, generating 2 to 8 reactive thiols. After reduction for several hours at 37°C, the mixture is cooled down to room temperature and excess drug- linker (7, 10) added as a diluted D SO solution (final D SO content of up to 10% volume/volume of reaction mixture). The mixture was gently shaken at either 4°C or room temperature for the appropriate time, generally 1-3 hours. Excess reactive thiols can be reacted with a 'thiol capping reagent' like N-ethyi maleimide (NEM) at the end of the conjugation. Antibody-drug conjugates are concentrated using centrifugal spin-filters with a molecular weight cut-off of 10 kDa or higher, then purified by tangential flow filtration (TFF) or Fast Protein Liquid Chromatography (FPLC). Corresponding antibody-drug conjugates can be determined by analysis by High-Performance Liquid Chromatography (HPLC) or Uitra-High-Performance Liquid Chromatography (UHPLC) to assess drug-per-anfibody ratio (DAR) using reverse-phase chromatography (RP) or Hydrophobic-interaction Chromatography (H!C), coupled with UV-Visible, Fluorescence or Mass-Spectrometer detection; aggregate level and monomer purity can be analysed by HPLC or UHPLC using size-exclusion chromatography coupled with UV-Visible, Fluorescence or Mass- Spectrometer detection. Final conjugate concentration is determined by a combination of spectroscopic (absorbance at 280, 214 and 330 nm) and biochemicai assay (bicinchonic acid assay BCA; Smith, P.K., et a ( 985) Anal. Biochem. 150 (1): 76-85; using a known- concentration igG antibody as reference). Antibody-drug conjugates are generally sterile filtered using 0.2 ,um filters under aseptic conditions, and stored at +4°C, -20°C or -80°C.

Examples of particular conjugations are described below.

Conjugate A (Ab-7, ConjA)

Antibody (Ab) (2.0 mg, 13.3 nanomoles) was diluted into 1.8 m of a reduction buffer containing 10 sodium borate pH 8.4, 2.5 M EDTA and a final antibody concentration of

1.1 1 mg/mL A 10 mM solution of TCEP was added (2 molar equivalent/antibody, 26.6 nanomoles, 2.66 µ!_) and the reduction mixture was heated at 37°C for 2.3 hours in a heating block. After cooling down to room temperature, compound 7 was added as a DMSO solution (3.5 molar equivalent/antibody, 46.7 nanomoles, in 0.2 mL DMSO). The solution was mixed for 1 hour at room temperature then the conjugation was quenched by addition of N-ethyi maleimide ( 1 micromole, L at 100 mM) followed 15 minutes later by N-acetyl cystein ( 1.5 micromoles, 15 uL at 100 mM), then injected into a AKTA™FPLC using a GE

Healthcare XK16/70 column packed with Superdex 200 PG, eiuting with .5 mL/min of sterile-filtered Phosphaie-buffered saline (PBS). Fractions corresponding to ConjA monomer peak were pooled, concentrated using a 15mL Amicon Ultracell 50KDa WCO spin filter, analysed and sterile-filtered. BCA assay gives a concentration of final ConjA at 1.25 mg/mL in 1.4 mL, obtained mass of ConjA is 1.75 g (87% yield). UHPLC analysis on a Shimadzu Prominence system using a Phenomenex Aeris 3.6u XB- C18 150 x 2.1 mm column eiuting with a gradient of water and acetonitrile on a reduced sample of ConjA at 280 nm and 330 nm (Compound 7 specific) shows a mixture of light and heavy chains attached to several molecules of compound 7, consistent with a drug-per- antibody ratio (DAR) of 2.8 molecules of compound 7 per antibody. UHPLC analysis on a Shimadzu Prominence system using a Waters Acquity UPLC BEH200 SEC 1.7 urn 4.6 x 150 mm column eiuting with sterile-filtered Phosphaie-buffered saline (PBS) containing 5% isopropanol ( v/v) on a sample of ConjA at 280 nm shows a monomer purity of over 99% with no impurity detected. Conjugate B (Ab-10, ConjB) Antibody (Ab) (2.0 g, 13.3 nanomo!es) was diluted Into 1.8 L of a reduction buffer containing 10 m sodium borate pH 8.4, 2.5 mM EDTA and a final antibody concentration of

1.1 1 mg/mL. A 10 solution of TCEP was added (2 molar equivalent/antibody, 26.8 nanomo!es, 2.66 µ Ι ) and the reduction mixture was heated at 37°C for 1.5 hours in a heating block. After cooling down to room temperature, compound was added as a

DMSO solution (3.5 moiar equivalent/antibody, 46.7 nanomo!es, in 0.2 mL DMSO). The solution was mixed for 2 hour at room te erat e, then the conjugation was quenched by addition of N-ethy! maieimide ( 1 micromole, 10 µ Ι_at 100 mM) followed 15 minutes later by

N-acetyl cystein ( 1.5 micromoles, 15 µ Ι_ at 100 mM), then injected into a AKTA™FPLC using a GE Healthcare XK16/70 column packed with Superdex 200 PG, eluting with 1.5 mL/min of sterile-filtered Phosphate-buffered saiine (PBS). Fractions corresponding to ConjB monomer peak were pooled, concentrated using a 15mL Amicon U race l 50KDa MWCO spin filter, analysed and sterile-filtered. BCA assay gives a concentration of final ConjB at 0.99 mg/mL in 1.4 mL, obtained mass of ConjB is 1.39 mg (70% yield).

UHPLC analysis on a Shimadzu Prominence system using a Phenomenex Aeris 3.8u XB- C18 150 x 2.1 mm column eluting with a gradient of water and acetonitrile on a reduced sample of ConjB at 280 nm and 330 n (Compound specific) shows a mixture of light and heavy chains attached to several molecules of compound B, consistent with a drug-per- antibody ratio (DAR) of 3.8 molecules of compound 1 per antibody.

UHPLC analysis on a Shimadzu Prominence system using a Waters Acquity UPLC BEH200 SEC 1.7 urn 4.6 x 150 mm column eluting with sterile-filtered Phosphate-buffered saline (PBS) containing 5% isopropanoi (v/v) on a sample of ConjB at 280 nm shows a monomer purity of over 99% with no impurity detected.

Conjugate C (Ab-27, ConjC) Antibody (2.5 g, 6.7 nanomo!es) was diluted into 2.25 mL of a reduction buffer containing

10 mM sodium borate pH 8.4, 2.5 mM EDTA and a final antibody concentration of 1. 1 mg/mL. A mM solution of TCEP was added ( 1 .65 moiar equivalent/antibody. 27.5 nanomoies, 2.75 mL) and the reduction mixture was heated at +37°C for 1.6 hours in an incubator. After cooling down to room temperature, compound 27 was added as a DMSO solution (7.5 moiar equivalent/antibody, 125 nanomoies, in 0.25 mL DMSO). The solution was mixed for 1.3 hours at room temperature, then the conjugation was quenched by addition of /V-acetyi cysteine (250 nanomoles, 25 L at 10 mM), then injected into an AKTA™ Pure FPLC using a GE Healthcare HiLoad 26/600 column packed with Superdex 200 PG, e!uting with 2.6 mL/min of ste le-f tered phosphate-buffered saline (PBS). Fractions corresponding to ConjC monomer peak were pooled, concentrated using a 15mL Amicon Uitraceil 50KDa VVCO spin filter, analysed and sterile-filtered. UHPLC analysis on a Shimadzu Prominence system using a Phenomenex Aeris 3.6u XB- C18 150 x 2.1 mm column eluting with a gradient of water and acetonitrile on a reduced sample of ConjC at 280 n and 330 ni (compound 27 specific) shows a mixture of light and heavy chains attached to several molecules of compound 27, consistent with a drug-per- antibody ratio (DAR) of 2.56 molecules of compound 27 per antibody.

UHPLC analysis on a Shimadzu Prominence system using a Tosoh Bioscience TSKgei G3000SWXL 5 7.8 x 300 mm column (with a 7 µη 6.0 x 40 m guard column) eluting with sterile-filtered SEC buffer containing 200 m potassium phosphate pH 6.95, 250 m potassium chloride and 10% isopropanoi (v/v) on a sample of ConjC at 280 nm shows a monomer purity of over 99% with no impurity detected. UHPLC SEC analysis gives a concentration of final ConjC at 0.77 mg/rmL in 2.5 mL, obtained mass of ConjC is 1.93 mg

(77% yield).

Conjugate D (Ab-29, C JD) Antibody (3.5 mg, 23.3 nanomoles) was diluted into 3.15 mL of a reduction buffer containing

0 mM sodium borate pH 8.4, 2.5 mM EDTA and a final antibody concentration of 1. mg/mL. A 10 mM solution of TCEP was added (2.0 molar equivalent/antibody, 46.7 nanomoles, 4.67 mL) and the reduction mixture was heated at ÷37°C for 1.6 hours in an incubator. After cooling down to room temperature, compound 29 was added as a DMSO solution (10 molar equiva!ent/antibody, 233 nanomoles, in 0.175 mL DMSO). The solution was mixed for 3.9 hours at room temperature, at which point more compound 29 was added as a DMSO solution (10 molar equivalent/antibody, 233 nanomoles, in 0.175 mL DMSO), and the solution was mixed for a further 19 hours at room temperature. The conjugation was quenched by addition of A/-acetyl cysteine (933 nanomoles, 93.3 mL at 10 mM), then injected into an AKTA™ Pure FPLC using a GE Healthcare HiLoad 26/600 column packed with Superdex 200 PG, eluting with 2.6 mL/min of sterile-filtered phosphate-buffered saline (PBS). Fractions corresponding to ConjD monomer peak were pooled, concentrated using a 15mL Amicon Uitracell 50KDa MWCO spin filter, analysed and sterile-fiitered. UHPLC analysis on a Shimadzu Prominence system using a Phenomenex Aeris 3.6u XB-

C 18 150 x 2 .1 mm column eiuting with a gradient of water and acetonifriie on a reduced sample of ConjD at 280 nm and 330 nm (Compound 29 specific) shows a mixture of light and heavy chains attached to severai molecules of compound 29, consistent with a drug- per-antibody ratio (DAR) of 2.43 molecules of compound 29 per antibody. UHPLC analysis on a Shimadzu Prominence system using a Tosoh Bioscience TSKge! G3000SWXL 5 7.8 x 300 mm column (with a 7 µ 6.0 x 40 mm guard column) eiuting with sterile-fiifered SEC buffer containing 200 m potassium phosphate pH 6.95, 250 mM potassium chloride and 0% isopropanoi (v/v) on a sample of ConjB at 280 nm shows a monomer purity of over 99% with no impurity detected. UHPLC SEC analysis gives a concentration of final ConjB at 0.73 mg/mL in 3.3 mL, obtained mass of ConjB is 2.42 g

(69% yield ).

Conjugate E (Ab-34, ConjE) Antibody (2.5 g, 16.7 nanomo!es) was diluted into 2.25 mL of a reduction buffer containing 10 mM sodium borate pH 8.4, 2.5 m EDTA and a final antibody concentration of 1.1 mg/mL. A 10 solution of TCEP was added ( 1 .65 molar equivalent/antibody, 27.5 nanomoles, 2.75 mL) and the reduction mixture was heated at +37°C for 1.6 hours in an incubator. After cooling down to room temperature, compound 34 was added as a D SO solution (7.5 molar equivalent/antibody, 125 nanomoles, in 0.25 mL DMSO). The solution was mixed for 1.3 hours at room temperature, then the conjugation was quenched by addition of -acetyI cysteine (250 nanomoles, 25 mL at 0 mM), then injected into an AKTA™ Pure FPLC using a GE Healthcare HiLoad 26/800 column packed with Superdex 200 PG, eiuting with 2.6 mL/min of sterile-filtered phosphate-buffered saline (PBS). Fractions corresponding to ConjE monomer peak were pooled, concentrated using a 15mL Amicon Ultraceil 50KDa MWCO spin filter, analysed and sterile-filtered.

UHPLC analysis on a Shimadzu Prominence system using a Phenomenex Aeris 3.6u XB-

C 18 150 x 2 .1 mm column eiuting with a gradient of water and acetonitrile on a reduced sample of ConjCE at 280 nm and 330 nm (Compound 34 specific) shows a mixture of light and heavy chains attached to severai molecules of compound 34, consistent with a drug- per-antibody ratio (DAR) of 2.45 molecules of compound 34 per antibody.

UHPLC analysis on a Shimadzu Prominence system using a Tosoh Bioscience TSKge! G3000SVYXL 5 7.8 x 300 mm column (with a 7 6.0 x 40 mm guard column) eiuting with sterile-filtered SEC buffer containing 200 mM potassium phosphate pH 6.95, 250 mM potassium chloride and 10% isopropano! (v/v) on a sample of ConjE at 280 n shows a monomer purity of over 99% with no impurity detected. UHPLC SEC analysis gives a concentration of final ConjE at 1.05 mg/mL in 2.0 mL, obtained mass of ConjE is 2.09 mg (84% yield).

Conjugate F (Ab-36, ConjF) Antibody (3.5 mg, 23.3 nanomoles) was diluted into 3.15 mL of a reduction buffer containing

10 mM sodium borate pH 8.4, 2.5 m EDTA and a final antibody concentration of 1. 1 mg/mL. A 10 mM solution of TCEP was added (2.0 molar equivalent/antibody, 46.7 nanomoles, 4.87 mL) and the reduction mixture was heated at 37 C for 1.6 hours in an incubator. After cooling down to room temperature, compound 36 was added as a D SO solution (10 molar equivalent/antibody, 233 nanomoles, in 0.175 mL DMSO). The solution was mixed for 3.9 hours at room temperature, at which point more compound 36was added as a DMSO solution (10 molar equivalent/antibody, 233 nanomoles, in 0.175 mL DMSO), and the solution was mixed for a further 19 hours at room temperature. The conjugation was quenched by addition of -acety! cysteine (933 nanomoles, 93.3 mL at 10 mM), then injected into an AKTA™ Pure FPLC using a GE Healthcare HiLoad 26/600 column packed with Superdex 200 PG, eluting with 2.6 mL/min of sterile-filtered phosphate-buffered saline (PBS). Fractions corresponding to ConjF monomer peak were pooled, concentrated using a 15mL Amicon Uitraceil 50KDa MWCO spin filter, analysed and sterile-filtered.

UHPLC analysis on a Shimadzu Prominence system using a Phenomenex Aeris 3.6u XB- C18 150 x 2.1 mm column eluting with a gradient of water and acetonitriie on a reduced sample of ConjF at 280 nm and 330 nm (Compound 38 specific) shows a mixture of light and heavy chains attached to several molecules of compound 36, consistent with a drug- per-antibody ratio (DAR) of 2.57 molecules of compound 3 per antibody.

UHPLC analysis on a Shimadzu Prominence system using a Tosoh Bioscience TSKgel G3000SWXL 5 pm 7.8 x 300 mm column (with a 7 µη 6.0 x 40 mm guard column) eluting with sterile-filtered SEC buffer containing 200 mM potassium phosphate pH 6.95, 250 mM potassium chloride and 10% isopropano! (v/v) on a sample of ConjF at 280 nm shows a monomer purity of over 99% with no impurity detected. UHPLC SEC analysis gives a concentration of final ConjF at 0.75 mg/mL in 3.8 mL, obtained mass of ConjF is 2.84 mg (81% yield). Conjugate G (Ab-45, ConjG) Antibody (2.5 mg, 16.7 nanomoles) was diluted into 2.25 mL of a reduction buffer containing

10 mM sodium borate pH 8.4, 2.5 mM EDTA and a fina! antibody concentration of 1. 1 1 mg/mL. A 10 mM solution of TCEP was added ( 1 .65 molar equivalent/antibody, 27.5 nanomoles, 2.75 mL) and the reduction mixture was heated at +37°C for 1.6 hours in an incubator. After cooling down to room temperature, compound 45 was added as a DMSO solution (7.5 molar equivalent/antibody. 125 nanomoles, in 0.25 ml DMSO). The solution was mixed for .3 hours at room temperature, then the conjugation was quenched by addition of A/-acetyi cysteine (250 nanomoles, 25 mL at 0 mM), then injected into an AKTA™ Pure FPLC using a GE Healthcare HiLoad™ 26/600 column packed with Superdex 200 PG, e ut ng with 2.6 mL/min of sterile-filtered phosphate-buffered saline (PBS). Fractions corresponding to ConjG monomer peak were pooled, concentrated using a 15mL Amicon Uitraceil 50KDa MWCO spin filter, analysed and sterile-filtered.

UHPLC analysis on a Shimadzu Prominence system using a Phenomenex Aeris 3.6u XB- C18 150 2.1 mm column eiuting with a gradient of water and acetonitrile on a reduced sample of ConjG at 280 nm and 330 nm (Compound 45 specific) shows a mixture of light and heavy chains attached to several molecules of compound 45, consistent with a drug- per-antibody ratio (DAR) of 2. 3 molecules of compound 45 per antibody.

UHPLC analysis on a Shimadzu Prominence system using a Tosoh Bioscience TSKgei G3000SWXL 5 rn 7.8 x 300 mm column (with a 7 µπι 6.0 x 40 mm guard column) eiuting with sterile-filtered SEC buffer containing 200 mM potassium phosphate pH 6.95, 250 mM potassium chloride and 10% isopropanol (v/v) on a sample of ConjG at 280 nm shows a monomer purity of over 99% with no impurity detected. UHPLC SEC analysis gives a concentration of final ConjG at 0.67 mg/mL in 2.9 mL, obtained mass of ConjG is 1.94 mg (78% yield).

The Antibody used in the above conjugations was HERCEPTIN. Example 9: vivo ADC efficacy studies CB.17 SC D mice, aged 8-12 weeks, may be injected with 1 mm3 tumour fragments sub cutaneous!y in the flank. When tumours reach an average size of 100 - 150 mg, treatment may be begun. Mice may be weighed twice a week. Tumour size may be measured twice a week. Animals may be monitored individually. The endpoint of the experiment is a tumour volume of 1000 mm3 or 60 days, whichever comes first. Responders can be followed longer.

Groups of 10 xenografted mice can be injected i.v. with 0.2m! of antibody drug conjugate (ADC), or naked antibody, in phosphate buffered saline (vehicle) or with 0.2ml of vehicle alone. The concentration of ADC can be adjusted to give, for example, 0.3 or 1.0 mg ADC/ kg body weight in a single dose. Three identical doses may be given to each mouse at intervals of, for example, 1 week.

Example 10: In vitro ADC efficacy studies Medium from subconfluent (about 80-90% confluency) SK-BR-3 ceils in a T75 flask was aspirated and PBS (about 20ml) was added to rinse away the culture medium. The PBS was aspirated and Trypsin-EDTA (5ml) added. The flask was returned to the 37°C gassed incubator for up to about 5 minutes. The flask was rapped sharply to dislodge and dissociate ceils from the plastic. The ceil suspension was transferred to a sterile 50ml screw- top centrifuge tube. Medium (McCoy's + 10% FCS) was added to a final volume of 15ml, then the tube was centrifuged (400g for 5 min). The supernatant was aspirated and the pellet re-suspended in 10ml culture medium. Repeated aspiration (up and down a 10ml pipette) may be necessary to break up cell clumps and produce monodisperse cell suspensions suitable for counting. Ceil suspension (10 µ Ι) was mixed with Trypan blue ( 1ΟµΙ ) and live/dead cells counted with a haemocytometer to determine cell concentration and viability. The cell suspension was diluted to 20x1 0 /m! and 50µ Ι was dispensed into clear 96 well flat bottomed plates. The ceils were incubated overnight to allow recovery before use.

A stock solution ( 1ml) of antibody drug conjugate (ADC) (20pg/ml) was made by dilution of filter-sterilised ADC into cell culture medium. A set of 8x 10-fold dilutions of stock ADC was made in a 24 well plate by serial transfer of 00µ Ι onto 900 µ! of ceil culture medium.

50 µ of each ADC dilution is dispensed into 4 replicate wells of the 96 well plate, containing 50µ Ι ceil suspension seeded the previous day. Control wells receive 50µ ceil culture medium. The 96-well plate containing cells and ADCs was incubated at 37°C in a C0 ~gassed incubator for 4 days. At the end of the incubation period, viabie ceils were measured by MTS assay. MTS (Promega) was dispensed (20µί per well) into each well and incubated for 4 hours at 37°C in the C0 2-gassed incubator. We absorbance was measured at 490nm. Percentage cell survival is calculated from the mean absorbance in the 4 ADC-treated wells compared to the mean absorbance in the 4 controi wells (100%).

ADC ECso (Mg/mi)

ConjD 0.00 1696

ConjE 0.002768

ConjF 0.003576

ConjG 0.006 163

ConjC 0.0006929 Abbreviations Ac acetyl Acm acetamidomethyl Alloc al!yloxycarbonyi Boc di-terf-buty! dicarbonate t-Bu tert-butyl Bzi benzyl where Bzl-OMe is methoxybenzvl and Bzi-Me s methylbenzene Cbz or Z benzyloxy-carbonyl, where Z-Ci and Z-Br are chloro- and bromobenzyloxy carbonyi respectively DMF A -dimethylformamide Dnp dinitrophenyi DTT dithiothreitol Fmoc 9H-fluoren-9-ylmethoxycarbonyl imp - 10 imine protecting group: 3-(2-methoxyethoxy)propanoate-Vai-Aia-PAB MC-OSu maieimidocaproyi-0-A/-succinimide Moc methoxycarbonyi MP maieimidopropanarriide Mtr 4-methoxy-2,3,6-trimethtylbenzenesulfonyi PAB para-aminobenzyloxycarbonyl PEG ethyleneoxy PNZ p-nitrobenzyl carbamate Psec 2-(phenylsulfonyi)ethoxycarbonyl TBD S tert-butyldimethylsilyl TBDPS tert-butyldiphenylsilyl Teoc 2~(trimethylsiiyl)ethoxycarbonyl Tos osy Troc 2,2,2-trich!orethoxycarbonyl chloride Trt r ty Xan xanthyi References The following references are incorporated by reference in their entirety: EP 0522868 EP 0875569 EP 1295944 EP 1347046 EP 1394274 EP 1394274 EP 1439393 JP 05003790 JP 20041 3 15 1 JP 58180487 US 2001/055751 US 2002/034749 US 2002/042366 US 2002/1 50573 US 2002/193567 US 2003/0228319 US 2003/060612 US 2003/064397 US 2003/065143 US 2003/091580 US 2003/096961 US 2003/105292 US 2003/109676 US 2003/1 18592 US 2003/1 19121 US 2003/1 19122 US 2003/1 19125 US 2003/1 19126 US 2003/1 19128 US 2003/1 19129 US 2003/1 19130 US 2003/1 19131 US 2003/124140 US 2003/124579 US 2003/129192 US 2003/1 34790-A1 US 2003/143557 US 2003/157089 US 2003/165504 US 2003/185830 US 2003/186372 US 2003/186373 US 2003/194704 US 2003/206918 US 2003/219806 US 2003/22441 1 US 2003/224454 US 2003/232056 US 2003/232350 US 20030096743 US 20030130189 US 2003096743 US 2003130189 US 2004/0001827 US 2004/005320 US 2004/005538 US 2004/005563 US 2004/005598 US 2004/0101899 US 2004/018553 US 2004/022727 US 2004/044179 US 2004/044180 US 2004/101874 US 2004/197325 U 2004/249130 US 20040018194 US 20040052793 US 20040052793 US 20040121940 US 2005/271615 US 2006/1 16422 US 4816567 US 5362852 US 5440021 US 5583024 US 5621002 US 5644033 US 5674713 US 5700670 US 5773223 US 5792616 US 5854399 US 5869445 US 5976551 US 601 146 US 6153408 US 6214345 US 6218519 US 6268488 US 6518404 US 6534482 US 6555339 US 6602677 US 6677435 US 6759509 US 6835807 US 7223837 US 7375078 US 752 US 7723485 WO 00/012508 WO 00/12507 WO 01/16318 WO 01/45746 WO 02/088172 WO 03/026577 WO 03/043583 WO 04/032828 WO 2000/12130 WO 2000/14228 WO 2000/20579 WO 2000/22129 WO 2000/32752 WO 2000/36107 WO 2000/40614 WO 2000/44899 WO 2000/55351 WO 2000/75655 WO 200053216 WO 2001/00244 WO 2001/38490 WO 2001/40269 WO 2001/40309 WO 2001/41787 WO 2001/46232 WO 2001/46261 WO 2001/48204 WO 2001/53463 WO 2001/57188 WO 2001/62794 WO 2001/66689 WO 2001/72830 WO 2001/72962 WO 2001/75177 WO 2001/77172 WO 2001/88133 WO 2001/94641 WO 2001/98351

VVO 2002/02587 WO 2002/02624 WO 2002/06317 WO 2002/06339 WO 2002/101075 WO 2002/10187 WO 2002/1 02235 WO 2002/1 0382

VVO 2002/12341 WO 2002/1 3847 WO 2002/14503 WO 2002/16413 WO 2002/1 6429 WO 2002/22153 WO 2002/22636 WO 2002/22660 WO 2002/22808 WO 2002/24909 WO 2002/26822 WO 2002/30268 WO 2002/38766 WO 2002/54940 WO 2002/59377 WO 2002/60317 WO 2002/61087; WO 2002/64798 WO 2002/71928 WO 2002/72596 WO 2002/78524 WO 2002/81646 WO 2002/83866 WO 2002/86443 WO 2002/89747

VVO 2002/92836 VVO 2002/94852 WO 2002/98358 WO 2002/99074 WO 2002/99122 WO 2003/000842 WO 2003/002717 WO 2003/003906 WO 2003/003984

VVO 2003/004989 WO 2003/008537 WO 2003/009814 WO 2003/014294 WO 2003/016475 WO 2003/016494 WO 2003/018621 WO 2003/022995 WO 2003/023013 WO 2003/024392 WO 2003/025138 WO 2003/025148 WO 2003/025228 WO 2003/026493 WO 2003/029262 WO 2003/029277 WO 2003/029421 WO 2003/034984 WO 2003/035846 WO 2003/042661 WO 2003/045422 WO 2003/048202 WO 2003/054152 WO 2003/055439 WO 2003/062401 WO 2003/062401 WO 2003/072035 WO 2003/072036 WO 2003/077836 WO 2003/081210 WO 2003/083041 WO 2003/083047 WO 2003/083074 WO 2003/087306 WO 2003/087768 WO 2003/088808 WO 2003/089624 WO 2003/089904 WO 2003/093444 WO 2003/097803 WO 2003/101283 WO 2003/101400 WO 2003/1 04270 WO 2003/1 04275 WO 2003/1 05758 WO 2003004529 WO 2003042661 WO 2003104399 WO 2004/000997 WO 2004/001004 WO 2004/009622 WO 2004/01 161 1 WO 2004/015426 WO 2004/016225 WO 2004/020595 WO 2004/022709 WO 2004/022778 WO 2004/027049 WO 2004/032828 WO 2004/032842

VVO 2004/040000 WO 2004/043361 WO 2004/043963 WO 2004/044178 WO 2004/045516 WO 2004/045520 WO 2004/045553 WO 2004/046342 WO 2004/047749 WO 2004/048938 WO 2004/053079 WO 2004/063355 WO 2004/063362 WO 2004/063709 WO 2004/065577 WO 2004/074320 WO 2004000221 WO 2004020583 WO 2004042346 WO 2004065576 WO 2005/023814 WO 2005/082023 WO 2005/085251 WO 2006/1 11759 WO 2007/044515 WO 2007/085930 WO 2009/052249 WO 2010/091 150 WO 91/02536 WO 92/07574 WO 92/17497 WO 94/10312 WO 94/28931 WO 9630514 WO 97/07198 WO 97/44452 WO 98/13059 WO 98/37193 WO 98/40403 WO 98/51805 WO 98/51824 WO 99/28468 WO 99/46284 WO 99/58658

Am. j . Hum. Genet 49 (3):555-565 (1991)

Amiei J., et a ! Hum. MoL Genet. 5, 355-357, 1996 Amir et a (2003) Angew. Chem. int. Ed. 42:4494-4499 Amsberry, et ai (1990) J. Org. Chem 55:5867 Angew Chem. Intl. Ed. Eng . (1994) 33:183-186

Annu. Rev. Neurosci. 2 1:309-345 (1998) Aral H., et ai J. Biol. Chem. 268, 3463-3470, 1993 Aral H., et ai Jpn. Circ. J. 56, 1303-1307, 1992 Arima, et ai., J. Antibiotics, 25, 437-444 (1972) Attie T., et ai, Hum. MoL Genet. 4, 2407-2409, 1995 Auricchio A., et a Hum. MoL Genet. 5:351-354, 1996 Bare! M., et ai Mol. Immunol. 35, 1025-1031, 1998 Bareiia et a (1995) Biochem. J. 309:773-779

Barnett T., et a ! Genomics 3, 59-66, 1988 Beck et a! (1992) J. MoL Bio!. 228:433-441

Beck et a ! (1996) J. MoL Bio . 255:1-13 Berge, et al., J. Pharm. Sci., 66, 1-19 (1977) Biochem. Biophys. Res. Commun. (2000) 275(3):783-788 Biochem. Biophys. Res. Commun. 255 (2), 283-288 (1999) Blood (2002) 100 (9):3068-3076 Blood 99 (8):2662-2669 (2002) Biumberg H., et ai Cell 104, 9-19, 2001 Bose, et al., Tetrahedron, 48, 751-758 (1992)

Bourgeois C , et a ! J. Clin. Endocrinol. Metab. 82, 3 1 16-3123, 1997 Brinster et a (1988) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 85:836 Buchrnan and Berg (1988) o Cell. Bio . 8:4395

Cancer Res. 6 1 (15), 5857-5860 (2001) Cari et al (1981) J. Med. Chem. 24:479-480 Carisson et a (1978) Biochem. J. 173:723-737 Carter, P. (2006) Nature Reviews immunology 6:343-357 Ceil 109 (3):397-407 (2002) CeilTiter Gio Luminescent Ceil Viability Assay, Promega Corp. Technical Bulletin TB288 Chakravarty et ai (1983) J. Med. Chem. 26:638-644 Chan J . and Watt, V. ., Oncogene 6 (6), 1057-1061 (1991) Child et ai (1999) J. Bioi. Chem. 274: 24335-24341

Cho H.-S., et ai Nature 421, 756-760, 2003 Ciccodicola, A., et ai E BO J. 8(7):1987-1991 (1989)

Clackson et a ! (1991) Nature, 352:624-628 Clark H.F., et al Genome Res. 13, 2265-2270, 2003

Corey E, Quinn JE, Buhier KR, et al. LuCap35: a new model of prostate cancer progression to androgen independence. The Prostate 2003;55:239-46 Coussens L , et al Science (1985) 230(4730):1 132-1 39 Cree et al (1995) Anticancer Drugs 6:398-404 Crouch et ai (1993) J. Immunol. eth. 160:81-88 Davis et al (2001) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci USA 98(17):9772-9777 de Groot et al (2001 ) J. Org. Chem. 66:881 5-8830 de Groot et al (2003) Angew. Chem. int. Ed. 42:4490-4494 Dennis et al. (2002) "Albumin Binding As A Genera! Strategy For improving The Pharmacokinetics Of Proteins" J Biol Chem. 277:35035-35043 Dobner et al (1992) Eur. J. Immunol. 22:2795-2799 Dornan et al (2009) B ood 14(1 3):272 1-2729

Doronina et a ! (2006) Bioconj. Chem. 17:1 14-124 Dubowchik et al. Bioconjugate Chemistry, 2002, 13,855-869 Dubowchik, et ai. (1997) Tetrahedron Letters, 38:5257-60 Dumoutier L„ et al J. Immunol. 167, 3545-3549, 2001

E. Schroder and K . Lubke, The Peptides, volume 1, pp 76-136 (1965) Academic Press Ehsani A., e al (1993) Genomics 15, 426-429 Elie!, E. and Wi!en, 8., "Stereochemistry of Organic Compounds", John Wiley & Sons, inc., New York, 1994 EishoLirbagy N.A., et al J. Biol, Chem. 288, 3873-3879, 1993 Erickson et al (2008) Cancer Res. 86(8):1~8

Feild, JA, et a ! (1999) Biochem. Biophys. Res. Commun. 258 (3):578-582 Fields, G. and Nobie, R . (1990) "Solid phase peptide synthesis utiiizing 9- fluoroenylmethoxycarbonyl amino acids", Int. J. Peptide Protein Res. 35:161-214 Fuchs S., et ai Mol. Med. 7, 115-124, 2001 Fujisaku et al (1989) J. Biol. Chem. 264 (4):21 18-2125) Gary S.C., et al Gene 256, 139-147, 2000 Gaugitsch, H.W., et ai (1992) J. Biol. Chem. 267 (16):1 1267-1 1273) Geiser et al "Automation of soiid-phase peptide synthesis" in Macromolecular Sequencing and Synthesis, Alan R. Liss, inc., 1988, pp. 199-218

Genome Res 13 (10):2265-2270 (2003) Genomics 62 (2):281-284 (1999) Geoghegan & Stroh, (1992) Bioconjugate Chem. 3:138-146 Getz et al (1999) Anal. Biochem Vol 273:73-80 Glynne-Jones et al (2001) Int J Cancer. Oct 15; 94(2):1 78-84 Gregson et al., Chem. Commun. 99, 797-798 Gregson et al., J. Med. Chem. 2001, 44, 1161-1 174

G Z., e a ! Oncogene 19, 1288-1296, 2000 Ha et al (1992) J. Immunol. 148(5):1526-1531 Haend!er B., et al J. Cardiovasc. Pharmacol. 20, s1-S4, 1992 Hamann P. (2005) Expert Opin. Ther. Patents 15(9):1087-1 103 Hambiett et al (2004) Clin. Cancer Res. 10:7063-7070 Handbook of Pharmaceutical Additives, 2nd Edition (eds. . Ash and Ash), 2001 (Synapse Information Resources, inc., Endicott, New York, USA) Handbook of Pharmaceutical Excipients, 2nd edition, 1994 Hara, et al., J. Antibiotics, 41, 702-704 (1988) Hashimoto et al (1994) Immunogenetics 40(4):287-295 Hay et al. (1999) Bioorg. Med. Chem. Lett. 9:2237 Herdwijn, P. et a!., Canadian Journal of Chemistry. 1982, 60, 2903-7 Hermanson, G.T. (1996) Bioconjugate Techniques; Academic Press: New York, p 234- 242 Hochiowski, e al., J. Antibiotics, 40, 145-148 (1987)

Hofstra R.M.W., e a ! Eur. J. Hum. Genet. 5, 180-185, 1997

Hofetra R.M.W., e a ! Nat. Genet. 12, 445-447, 1996 Horie et a (2000) Genomics 67:146-152

Hubert R.S., et a (1999) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 96 (25): 14523-1 4528) Hurley and Needham-VanDevanter, Acc. Chern. Res., 19, 230-237 (1986) Immunogenetics 54 (2):87-95 (2002) nt. Rev. CytoL 196:177-244 (2000) Itoh, et al., J. Antibiotics, 41, 1281-1284 (1988) J. Bio!. Chem. 270 (37):21 984-21 990 (1995) J. Biol. Chem. 276 (29):27371 -27375 (2001) J. Biol. Chem. 277 (22):1 9665- 9672 (2002) J. Biol Chem. 278 (33):3081 3-30820 (2003) Janeway, , Travers, P., Waiport, M., Shiomchik (2001) immuno Biology, 5th Ed., Garland Publishing, New York Jeffrey et ai (2005) J. Med. Chem. 48:1344-1358 Jonsson et al (1989) Immunogenetics 29(6):41 -4 3 Junutu!a, et a!., 2008b Nature Biotech., 26(8):925-932 Kang, G-D., et al., Chem. Commun., 2003, 1680-1689 Kasahara et al ( 989) Immunogenetics 30(1 ):66-68 King et al (2002) Tetrahedron Letters 43:1987-1990 Kingsbury et al (1984) J. Med. Chem. 27:1447 Koh er et ai (1975) Nature 256:495

Kobn, in Antibiotics III. Springer-Ver!ag, New York, pp. 3-1 (1975). Konishi, et ai., J. Antibiotics, 37, 200-206 (1984) Kovtun et al (2006) Cancer Res. 66(6):3214-3121 Kuhns J.J., et al J Biol. Chem. 274, 36422-36427, 1999 Kuminoto, et al., J. Antibiotics, 33, 665-667 (1980) Kurebayashi et al (1999) Brit Jour. Cancer 79(5-6):707-717

Lab. invest. 82 ( 1 ) :1573- 582 (2002) Lambert J. (2005) Current Opin. in Pharmacol. 5:543-549 Langiey and Thurston, J. Org. Chem., 52, 91-97 (1987)

Larhammar et ai (1985) J. Biol. Chem. 260(26):141 11-141 19 Law et al (2006) Cancer Res. 66(4):2328-2337

Le et al (1997) FEBS Lett 4 18( -2): 195-1 99 Leber, et ai., J. Am. Chem. Soc, 110, 2992-2993 (1988) Leimgruber, et ai., J. Am. Chem. Soc, 87, 5791-5793 (1965) Leimgruber, et ai., J. Am. Chem. Soc, 87, 5793-5795 (1965) Levenson et al (1997) Cancer Res. 57(15):3071-3078

Liang et a ! (2000) Cancer Res. 60:4907-12 Manfre, F. et a!.. J. Org. Chem. 992. 57, 2060-2065 Marks et ai (1991 ) J. o . Biol., 222:581-597 McDonagb (2006) Protein Eng. Design & SeL, 19(7): 299-307 Mendoza et ai (2002) Cancer Res. 62:5485-5488

Miller et a ! (2003) Jour of Immunology 170:4854-4861 M ura e al (1996) Genomics 38(3):299-304 Miura e al (1998) Blood 92:2815-2822 Moore . et al Proc. Nati. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 84, 9194-9198, 1987

Morrison et al (1984) Proc. Nati. Acad. Sci. USA, 8 1:6851-6855 Muller et ai (1992) Eur. J. Immunol. 22 (6):1 621 -1625

Mungali A.J., et a ! Nature 425, 805-81 , 2003 Nagase T., et al (2000) DNA Res. 7 (2):143-150) Nakamuta M., et ai Biochem. Biophys. Res. Commun. 177, 34-39, 1991 Nakayama et al (2000) Biochem. Biophys. Res. Commun. 277(1): 124-1 2 Naruse et al (2002) Tissue Antigens 59:512-519 Nature 395 (6699):288-291 (1998) Neuberger and Williams (1988) Nucleic Acids Res. 16:6713 Novabiochem Catalog 2006/2007

Ogawa Y., e ai Biochem. Biophys. Res. Commun. 178, 248-255, 1991 Okamoto Y., et al Biol. Chem. 272, 21589-21596, 1997 Oncogene 0 (5):897-905 (1995)

Oncogene 14(1 1): 377-1 382 (1997)) Parrish-Novak J., et al J. Biol. Chem. 277, 47517-47523. 2002 Payne, G. (2003) Cancer Cell 3:207-212 Phillips et al (2008) Cancer Res. 68(22):9280~9290

Pingauit V., et al (2002) Hum. Genet. 11, 198-206 P etne S., et ai (2003) Biochemistry 42:12617-12624 Preud'homme et al (1992) Clin. Exp. Immunol. 90(1 ):141~146 Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. (2003) 100 (7):4126-4131 Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 93 (1):136-140 (1996) Proc. Na l Acad Sci. U.S.A. 98 (17):9772-9777 (2001) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 99 (26): 16899-1 6903 (2002) Proc.Nati. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 96 (20):1 1531-1 1536 (1999) Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, Greene and VVuts, 3 d Edition, 1999, John Wiley & Sons Inc. Puffenberger E.G.. et al Cei 79, 1257-1266, 1994 Rao et al (1997) Breast Cancer Res. and Treatment 45:149-158 Reiter R.E., et al Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 95, 1735-1740, 1998 Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences, 20th edition, pub. Lippincott, Williams & Wilkins, 2000 Rodrigues et a (1995) Chemistry Biology 2:223 Ross et al (2002) Cancer Res. 62:2546-2553 S. P. Parker, Ed., McGraw-Hill Dictionary of Chemical Terms (1984) McGraw-Hill Book Company, New York

Sakaguchi et al (1988) EMBO J. 7(1 1):3457-3464 Sakamoto A., Yanagisawa ., et al Biochem. Biophys. Res. Commun. 1 8, 656-663, 99 1

Sanderson et al (2005) Clin. C Res. 11.843-852

Semba K., et a Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 82, 6497-6501, 1985 Servenius et al (1987) J. Biol. Chem. 262:8759-8766 Shamis et al (2004) J. Am. Chem. Soc. 126:1726-1731

Sheikh F., et a (2004) J. Immunol. 1 2, 2006-2010 Shimizu, et al, J. Antibiotics, 29, 2492-2503 (1982) Sinha S.K., et al (1993) J. Immunol. 150, 531 5320 Storm et a (1972) J. Amer. Chem. Soc. 94:5815 Strausberg et al (2002) Proc. Nail. Acad. Sci USA 99:16899-16903 Sun et al (2002) Bioorganic & Medicinal Chemistry Letters 12:2213-2215 Sun et al (2003) Bioorganic & Medicinal Chemistry 11:1761-1768 Svensson P.J., et Hum. Genet. 103, 145-148, 1998 Swiercz J.M., et al J. Cell Biol. 165, 869-880, 2004 Syrigos and Epenetos ( 999) Anticancer Research 19:605-614 Takeuchi, et al., J. Antibiotics, 29, 93-96 (1976) Tawaragi Y., et al Biochem. Biophys. Res. Commun. 150, 89-96, 1988 ten Dijke,P., et al Science 264 (5155):1 01-104 (1994)

Thompson, J.S., et al Science 293 (5537), 2108-21 11 (2001 ) VYO 2004/058309 Thurston, et al., Chem. Brit., 26, 767-772 (1990) Thurston, et al., Chem. Rev. 1994, 433-465 (1994) Tok et al (2002) J. Org. Chem. 67:1866-1872 Tonnelle et al (1985) EMBO J. 4(1 1}:2839-2847 Touchman et al (2000) Genome Res. 10:165-173

Trail et a ! (2003) Cancer Immunol. Immunother. 52:328-337 Tsunakawa, e al., J. Antibiotics, 41, 1366-1373 (1988) Tsutsumi M., et al Gene 228, 43-49, 1999 Uchida e a (1999) Biochem. Biophys. Res. Commun. 266:593-602 Verheij J.B., et al Am. J. Med. Genet. 108, 223-225, 2002 Von Hoegen et al (1990) J. Immunol. 144(12):4870-4877

Webster et a ! (1994) Semin. Cancer Biol. 5:69-76 Weis J.J., et al J. Exp. Med. 167, 1047-1066, 1988 Weis J.J., et al Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 83, 5639-5643, 1986 Wilson et al (1991) J. Exp. Med. 173:137-146 Wu et ai (2005) Nature Biotech. 23(9):1 137-1 145

Xie et a ! (2006) Expert. Op n Biol. Ther. 6(3):281-291 Xu, M.J., et ai (2001) Biochem. Biophys. Res. Commun. 280 (3):768-775 WO 2004/016225 Xu, X.Z., et ai Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 98 (19):10692-10697 (2001) Yamaguchi, N et ai Biol. Chem. 269 (2), 805-808 (1994) Yamamoto T„ et al Nature 319, 230-234, 1986 Yu et al (1992) J. Immunol. 148(2) 633-637 A conjugate of formula (A):

D 1 2 the dotted line indicates the optional presence of a double bond between C2 and C3; when there is a double bond present between C2 and C3, R2 is selected from the group consisting of:

(ia) C5.10 y group, optionaiiy substituted by one or more substituents selected from the group comprising: halo, nitro, cyano, ether, carboxy, ester, - alkyl, C3-7 heterocyciy! and bis-oxy-C -3 aikyiene;

(ib) C - saturated aliphatic alkyl;

(ic) C 3- saturated cydoaiky!;

(id) , wherein each of R3 , R32 and R are independently selected from H,

C1..3 saturated aikyi, C 2..3 alkenyi, C ..3 a!kyny! and cyciopropyi, where the total number of carbon atoms in the R2 group is no more than 5; (ie) , wherein one of R3 and R3 is H and the other is selected from: phenyl, which phenyl is optionally substituted by a group selected from halo, methyl, met and thiophenyl; and

, where R is selected from: H; C .. saturated a ky ; , aikenyl; C , alkynyl; cyclopropyl; phenyl, which phenyl is optionally substituted by a group selected from halo, methyl, methoxy; pyridyi; and thiophenyl; (ig) halo; when there is a single bond present between C2 and C3,

, where R and R are independently selected from H , F, C saturated alkyl, C -3 alkenyl, which alkyl and aikenyl groups are optionaliy substituted by a group selected from alkyl amido and C aikyi ester; or, when one of R a and R is H, the other is selected from nitriie and a C alkyl ester; D represents either gro D' or D"2:

D'2 wherein the dotted line indicates the optional presence of a double bond between C2' and

C3';

R and R9 are independently selected from H, R, OH, OR, SH, SR, NH , NHR, NRR\

N0 2, e Sn and halo; R7 s independently selected from H , R , OH, OR, SH, SR, H , NHR, NRR N0 ,

Me3Sn and halo; Y is selected from formulae A 1, A2, A3, A4, A5 and A6:

(A5) (A6)

L is a linker connected to a ceil binding agent; CBA is the cell binding agent; n s an integer selected in the range of 0 to 48; R is a C ky ene group; either

(a) R is H , and R is OH, OR , where R is C -4 alkyl; or (b) R and R 1 form a nitrogen-carbon double bond between the nitrogen and atoms to which they are bound; or

0 (c) R is H and R is OSOz , where z. is 2 or 3 and M is a monovalent pharmaceutically acceptable cation; R and R' are each independently selected from optionally substituted C - alkyl,

C3.20 heterocycly! and C5.20 ary groups, and optionai!y in relation to the group NRR', R and R together with the nitrogen atom to which they are attached form an optionally substituted 4-, 5-, 8- or 7-membered heterocyclic ring; wherein R 6 , R 7, R , R2 , R2 and R22 are as defined for R6, R7, R9, R 0 , R and R2 respectively; wherein Z is CH or N ;

wherein T and are independently selected from a single bond or a C .g aikyiene. which chain may be interrupted by one or more heteroatoms e.g. O, S, N(H), NMe, provided that the number of atoms in the shortest chain of atoms between X and X' is 3 to 12 atoms; and X and X' are independently selected from O, S and N(H); except that there cannot be double bonds between both C2 and C3 and C2' and C3'.

2. The conjugate according to claim 1, wherein R9 is H.

3. The conjugate according to either claim 1 or claim 2, wherein R6 is H.

4. The conjugate according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein R'' is OR , where R is optionally substituted C alkyl.

5. The conjugate of claim 4, wherein R7 is Me.

8. The conjugate according to any one of claims 1 to 5, wherein X is O.

7. The conjugate according to any one of claims 1 to 6, wherein T is selected from a single bond, C , and a C2 aikyiene group.

8. The conjugate according to claim 7, wherein T is a C aikyiene group.

9. The conjugate according to any one of claims 1 to 8, wherein D is D2.

10. The conjugate according to any one of claims 1 to 8, wherein D is D1, there is a 2 double bond between C2 and C3, and R is a C:,.,- ary group.

11. The conjugate according to claim 10, wherein R 2 is phenyl. 12. The conjugate according to any one of claims 1 to 8, wherein D is D1, there is a 2 double bond between C2 and C3, and R is a C - aryl group.

13. The conjugate according to any one of claims 10 to 12, wherein R 2 bears one to three substituent groups.

14. The conjugate according to any one of claims 10 to 13, wherein the substituents are selected from methoxy, ethoxy, fluoro, chloro, cyano, bis-oxy-methylene. methyl-piperazinyi, morpholino and methyi-thiophenyi.

15. The conjugate according to any one of claims 1 to 8, wherein D is D1, there is a 2 double bond between C2 and C3, and R is a C - saturated aliphatic aikyi group.

16. The conjugate according to claim 15, wherein R2 is methyl, ethyl or propyl.

17. The conjugate according to any one of claims 1 to 8, wherein D is D , there is a 2 double bond between C2 and C3, and R is a C3 saturated cycloalkyl group.

18. The conjugate according to claim 17, wherein R2 is cyc!opropyi.

19. The conjugate according to any one of claims 1 to 18, wherein D is D1, there is a double bond between C2 and C3, and R2 is a group of formula:

20. The conjugate according to claim 9, wherein the total number of carbon atoms in the R2 group is no more than 4.

2 1. The conjugate according to claim 20, wherein the total number of carbon atoms in the R2 group is no more than 3. 22. The conjugate according to any one of ciaims 19 to 2 1, wherein one of R , R32 and

33 R is H, with the other two groups being selected from H, C1.3 saturated aikyi, C ..3 aikenyl, C2-3 aikynyl and cyclopropyl.

23. The conjugate according to any one of ciaims 19 to 2 1, wherein two of R3 , R32 and

33 R are H, with the other group being selected from H, ..3 saturated aikyi, C2..3 aikenyl, C2..3 aikynyl and cyclopropyl.

24. The conjugate according to any one of ciaims 1 to 8, wherein D is D 1, there is a double bond between C2 and C3, and R2 is a group of formula:

ugate according to claim 24, wherein R 2 is the group:

26. The conjugate according to any one of claims 1 to 8, wherein D is D1, there is a d etween C2 and C3, and R2 is a group of formula:

27. A compound according to claim 26, wherein R is selected from H , methyl, ethyl, ethenyi and ethynyl.

A compound according to claim 27, wherein R is selected from H and methyl

29. The conjugate according to any one of claims 1 to 8, wherein D is D1. there is a 30. The conjugate according to claim 29, wherein R and R are both H.

3 . The conjugate according to claim 29, wherein R and R3 are both methyl.

32. The conjugate according to claim 29, wherein one of R and R3 is H, and the other is selected from C . saturated a ky , C2.3 alkenyl, which aikyi and alkenyl groups are optionally substituted.

33. The conjugate according to claim 29, wherein the group of R and R which is not H is selected from methyl and ethyl.

34. The conjugate according to any one of claims 1 to 33, wherein R 0 is H, and R1 is OH.

35. The conjugate according to any one of claims 1 to 33. wherein R and R form a nitrogen-carbon double bond between the nitrogen and carbon atoms to which they are bound.

36. The conjugate according to any one of claims 1 to 35, wherein R 1 , R ' , R ", R , R2 ,

D , X' and are the same as Rs, R7, R , R 0, R , D, X and T respectively

37. The conjugate according to any one of claims 1 to 38, wherein the group L contains a moiety derived from an electrophilic functional group selected from (i) maleimide groups (ii) activated disulfides, (iii) active esters such as NHS (N-hydroxysuccinimide) esters, HOBt (N- hydroxybenzotriazoie) esters, haloformates, and acid halides; (iv) alky! and benzyl halides such as haioacetamides; and (v) aldehydes, ketones, carboxyl.

38. The conjugate according to any one of claims 1 to 36, wherein L is of formula:

-L -(CH 2)m- (L1) where m is from 0 to 6 ; and L is selected from: where Ar represents a C5 - arylene group.

39. The conjugate of claim 38, wherein L is selected from L and

40. The conjugate according to either claim 38 or claim 39, wherein m is 2, 3 or 5 .

4 . The conjugate according to any one of claims 1 to 36, where L is of formula:

-L ~(CH )m~G- (L2) Where m is from 0 to 6; and L is selected from the groups as defined in claim 38.

42. The conjugate of claim 4 , wherein L is L 2.

43. The conjugate according to either claim 4 1 or 42, wherein m is 1. 44. The conjugate according to any one of claims 1 to 36, where L is of formula:

Where q is from 1 to 3, and p is from 1 to 3; and L is selected from the groups as defined in claim 38.

45. The conjugate of claim 44, wherein L is selected from L , L 8 1 and L 8 2.

46. The conjugate according to either claim 44 or 45, wherein q is 1.

47. The conjugate according to any one of claims 44 to 46, wherein p is 2.

48. The con ugate according to any one of claims 1 to 36, where L is of formula:

Where m is from 0 to 6; X1 and X2 are amino acid groups, selected fro natural amino acids, which may be modified; L is selected from the groups as defined in claim 38.

49. The conjugate according to claim 48, wherein the group -X X - is selected from: -Phe-Lys-, -Val-Ala-, -Val-Lys-, -Ala-Lys-, -Val-Cit-.

50. The conjugate according to either claim 48 or claim 49, wherein is 5.

5 1. The conjugate according to any one of claims 1 to 50, wherein n is an integer between 0 and 16.

52. The conjugate according to any one of claims 1 to 51, wherein n is an integer between 0 and 8. 53. The conjugate according to any one of claims 1 to 52, wherein n is 3 or 4.

54. The conjugate according to any one of claims 1 to 53, wherein the cell binding agent is an antibody or an active fragment thereof.

55. The conjugate according to claim 54, wherein the antibody or antibody fragment is an antibody or antibody fragment for a tumour-associated antigen.

56. The conjugate of claim 55 wherein the antibody or antibody fragment is an antibody which binds to one or more tumor-associated antigens or cell-surface receptors selected from ( 1 )-(36):

( 1 ) B PR B (bone morphogenetic protein receptor-type IB); (2) E16 (LAT1, SLC7A5); (3) STEAP1 (six transmembrane epithelial antigen of prostate); (4) 0772P (CA125, MUC16); (5) MPF (MPF, MSLN, 8 R, megakaryocyte potentiating factor, mesothelin); (6) Napi3b (NAPI-3B, NPTI!b, SLC34A2, solute carrier family 34 (sodium phosphate), member 2, type II sodium-dependent phosphate transporter 3b); (7) Sema 5b (FLJ 10372, KIAA1445, Mm.42015, SEMA5B, SE AG, Semaphorin 5b og, sema domain, seven thrombospondin repeats (type 1 and type 1- ke), transmembrane domain (T ) and short cytoplasmic domain, (semaphorin) 5B); (8) PSCA h g (2700050C12Rik, C530008O18Rik, RIKEN cDNA 2700050C12, R!KEN cDNA 2700050C12 gene); (9) ETBR (Endothelin type B receptor); (10) MSG783 (RNF124, hypothetical protein FLJ20315);

( 1 1) STEAP2 (HGNC_8639, IPCA-1, PCANAP1, STAMP 1, STEAP2, STMP, prostate cancer associated gene 1, prostate cancer associated protein 1, six transmembrane epithelial antigen of prostate 2, six transmembrane prostate protein); (12) Trp 4 (BR22450, FLJ20041, TRPM4, TRPM4B, transient receptor potential cation channel, subfamily , member 4); (13) CRIPTO (CR, CR1, CRGF, CRIPTO, TDGF1, teratocarcinoma-derived growth factor); (14) CD21 (CR2 (Complement receptor 2) or C3DR (C3d/Epstein Barr virus receptor) or Hs 73792); (15) CD79b (CD79B, CD79p, IGb (immunoglobulin-associated beta), B29); (16) FcRH2 (IFGP4, IRTA4, SPAP1A (SH2 domain containing phosphatase anchor protein 1a), SPAP1 B, SPAP1C); (17) HER2; (18) NCA; (19) MDP; (20) IL20Ra; (21) Brevican; (22) EphB2R; (23) ASLG659; (24) PSCA; (25) GEDA; (26) BAFF-R (B ceil -activating factor receptor, BLyS receptor 3 , BR3); (27) CD22 (B-ce!f receptor CD22-B isoform); (28) CD79a (CD79A, CD79a, immunoglobulin-associated alpha);

(29) CXCR5 (Burkitt's lymphoma receptor 1);

(30) HLA-DGB (Beta subunit of HC class l molecule (la antigen)); (31) P2X5 (Purinergic receptor P2X !igand-gated ion channel 5); (32) CD72 (B-cell differentiation antigen CD72. Lyb-2): (33) LY84 (Lymphocyte antigen 64 (RP105), type i membrane protein of the leucine rich repeat (LRR) family); (34) FcRHI (Fc receptor-like protein 1); (35) RTA2 (Immunoglobulin superfamily receptor translocation associated 2); (36) TENB2 (putative transmembrane proteoglycan); (37) CD33 (CD33 molecule, S!GLEC-3, S GLEC3 p67; CD33 antigen (gp67); gp67; myeloid cell surface antigen CD33; sialic acid binding ig-like lectin 3; sialic acid-binding ig- like iectinj; and (38) LGR5/GPR49.

57. The conjugate of claim 54 wherein the antibody or antibody fragment is a cysteine- engineered antibody.

58. The conjugate of either claim 54 or claim 57 wherein the antibody or antibody fragment is an antibody which binds to an ErbB receptor.

59. The conjugate of claim 58 wherein the antibody is trastuzumab. 60. The conjugate of either claim 54 or claim 57 wherein Ab is an anti-HER2, an anti-Steap1, or an anti~CD22 antibody.

8 1. The conjugate according to claim 54 wherein the drug loading (p) of drugs (D) to antibody (Ab) is an integer from 1 to about 8 .

62. The conjugate according to claim 8 1, wherein p is 1, 2, 3 , or 4.

63. The conjugate according to claim 62 comprising a mixture of the antibody-drug conjugate compounds, wherein the average drug loading per antibody in the mixture of antibody-drug conjugate compounds is about 2 to about 5.

64. The conjugate according to any one of claims 1 to 63, for use in therapy.

65. A pharmaceuticai composition comprising the conjugate of any one of claims 1 to 63 a pharmaceutically acceptable diluent, carrier or excipient.

66. The conjugate according to any one of claims 1 to 63 or the pharmaceutical composition according to claim 65, for use in the treatment of a proliferative disease in a subject.

67. The conjugate according to claim 66, wherein the disease is cancer.

68. Use of a conjugate according to any one of claims 1 to 63 or a pharmaceutical according to claim 66 or 67 in a method of medical treatment.

69. A method of medical treatment comprising administering to a patient the pharmaceutical composition of claim 66 or claim 67.

70. The method of claim 69 wherein the method of medical treatment is for treating cancer.

7 1. The method of claim 70, wherein the patient is administered a chemotherapeutic agent, in combination with the conjugate.

72. Use of a compound according to any one of claims 1 to 63 in a method of manufacture of a medicament for the treatment of a proliferative disease.

73. A method of treating a mammal having a proliferative disease, comprising administering an effective amount of a compound according to any one of ciaims 1 to 83 or a pharmaceutical composition according to ciaim 66 or claim 87.

74. A compound of formula (B):

D, D', R6, R7, R9, R 0, R , R 6, R 7, R 9, R20, R2 , Z, T, Τ ', X and X' are as defined in any one of ciaims 1 to 36; Y is selected from a group of formulae B1, B2, S3, B4. B5 and B6: B3) (B4)

(B5) (B6) G is a reaciive group for connecting to a cell binding agent

wherein n and R 4 are as defined in any one of claims 1 to 53.

75. The compound according to claim 64, wherein the group G contains an eiectrophiiic group selected from (i) maieimide groups (ii) activated disulfides, (iii) active esters such as NHS (N-hydroxysuccinimide) esters, HOB (N-hydroxybenzotriazoie) esters, haloformates, and acid haiides; (iv) alky! and benzyl haiides such as haioacetamsdes; and (v) aldehydes, ketones, carboxyl.

76. The compound according to either claim 74 or claim 75, wherein G is of formula:

G -(CH2)m- (G1) where m is from 0 to 6 ; and G is selected from: where Ar represents a C5.6 arylene group.

77. The compound of claim 76, wherein G is selected from G and G 3 .

78. The compound according to either claim 76 or claim 77, wherein is 2, 3 or 5.

79. The compound according to either claim 74 or claim 75, where G is of formula:

G -(CH2) -G- (G2) Where m is from 0 to 8; and G is as defined in claim 76.

80. The compound of claim 79, wherein G is G'' 8 . The compound according to either claim 79 or 80, wherein m is 1.

82. The compound according to either claim 74 or claim 75, where G is of formula:

Where q is from 1 to 3, and p is from 1 to 3; and G s as defined in claim 76.

83. The compound of claim 82, wherein G is selected from G 7 and G .

84. The compound according to either claim 82 or 83, wherein q is .

85. The compound according to any one of claims 82 to 84, wherein p is 2 .

86. The com ound according to either claim 74 or claim 75, where G is of formula:

Where m is from 0 to 6; X1 and X2 are amino acid groups, selected from natural amino acids, which may be modified; a G is as defined in claim 78.

87. The compound according to claim 86 wherein is 5.

88. A com ound of formula (C):

wherein: D, D', 5, R7, R , R 6, R 7 R 9, Z, T, Τ ', X and X' are as defined in any one of claims 1 to 36; Yc is selected from a group of formulae C1, C2, C3, C4, C5 and C6:

(C5) (C6)

wherein n and R are as defined in any one of claims 1 to 53; either

30 3 (a) R is H , and R is OH, OR , where R is C1-4 aikyi; or (b) R3 and R3 form a nitrogen-carbon double bond between the nitrogen and carbon atoms to which they are bound; or

(c) R30 is H and R3 is OSO-JV!, where z is 2 or 3 and M is a monovalent pharmaceutically acceptable cation; or (d) R30 is a nitrogen proteciing group amd R is OProl°, where Prot0 is a hydroxy protecting group; and R4 and R are as defined for R 0 and R respectively.

89. The compound according to claim 88, wherein R30 is H, and R3 is OH.

90. The compound according to claim 88, wherein R3 and R4 form a nitrogen-carbon double bond between the nitrogen and carbon atoms to which they are bound.

9 1. The compound according to claim 88, wherein R30 is a nitrogen protecting group and R3 is OProt°, where Prot° is a hydroxy! protecting group.

92. The compound according to claim 91, wherein the nitrogen protecting group is B

93. The compound according to either claim 9 1 or claim 92, wherein the hydroxy! protecting group is THP.

94. A com ound of formula (D):

wherein:

D, D', R6, R7, R , R 6, R , R , Z, T, , X and X' are as defined In any one of claims 1 to 36;

R30, R3 1, R40 and R4 are as defined in any one of claims 88 to 93; Y is selected from a group of formulae D2. D3, D4 and D6:

(D2) (D3) , —

(D4) (D6) wherein R is as defined in any one of claims 1 to 43.

A compound of formula (E):

wherein:

6 7 9 6 7 9 Τ D, D', R . R , R , R , R , R Z , T, ', X and X' are as defined in any one of claims 1 to 36;

R30, R3 , R40 and R4 are as defined in any one of claims 88 to 93; Y is selected from a group of formulae E1, E2 and E5:

where is selected from H and TMS; and

R 2 is selected from Br, C and . 96. A method of synthesis of a compound according to any one of claims 1 to 73, comprising the step of conjugating a drug-linker according to any one of ciaims 84 to a cell-binding agent.